Asme3d1 nb-3000

ARTICLE NB-3000
NB-3100 General Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

NB-3110 Loading Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NB-3111 Loading Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NB-3112 Design Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NB-3112.1 Design Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NB-3112.2 Design Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NB-3112.3 Design Mechanical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NB-3112.4 Design Stress Intensity Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NB-3113 Service Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NB-3120 Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3121 Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3122 Cladding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3122.1 Primary Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3122.2 Design Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3122.3 Secondary and Peak Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3122.4 Bearing Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3123 Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3123.1 Dissimilar Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3123.2 Fillet Welded Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3124 Environmental Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3125 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3130 General Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3131 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
NB-3132 Dimensional Standards for Standard Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NB-3133 Components Under External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NB-3133.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NB-3133.2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NB-3133.3 Cylindrical Shells and Tubular Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
NB-3133.4 Spherical Shells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
NB-3133.5 Stiffening Rings for Cylindrical Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
NB-3133.6 Cylinders Under Axial Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
NB-3134 Leak Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NB-3135 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NB-3137 Reinforcement for Openings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NB-3200 Design by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

NB-3210 Design Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3211 Requirements for Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3212 Basis for Determining Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3213 Terms Relating to Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3213.1 Stress Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3213.2 Gross Structural Discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
49
NB-3213.3 Local Structural Discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3213.4 Normal Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3213.5 Shear Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3213.6 Membrane Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3213.7 Bending Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NB-3213.8 Primary Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
NB-3213.9 Secondary Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
NB-3213.10 Local Primary Membrane Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
NB-3213.11 Peak Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
NB-3213.12 Load Controlled Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
NB-3213.13 Thermal Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
NB-3213.14 Total Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.15 Operational Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.16 Stress Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.17 Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.18 Free End Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.19 Expansion Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.20 Deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.21 Inelasticity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.22 Creep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.23 Plasticity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.24 Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.25 Plastic Analysis — Collapse Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.26 Plastic Instability Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NB-3213.27 Limit Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.28 Limit Analysis — Collapse Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.29 Collapse Load — Lower Bound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.30 Plastic Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.31 Strain Limiting Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.32 Test Collapse Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.33 Ratcheting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.34 Shakedown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.35 Reversing Dynamic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3213.36 Nonreversing Dynamic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3214 Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3215 Derivation of Stress Intensities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
NB-3216 Derivation of Stress Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
NB-3216.1 Constant Principal Stress Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
NB-3216.2 Varying Principal Stress Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
NB-3217 Classification of Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3220 Stress Limits for Other Than Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3221 Design Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3221.1 General Primary Membrane Stress Intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3221.2 Local Membrane Stress Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3221.3 Primary Membrane (General or Local) Plus Primary Bending Stress Intensity . . . . . 74
NB-3221.4 External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3222 Level A Service Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3222.1 Primary Membrane and Bending Stress Intensities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3222.2 Primary Plus Secondary Stress Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NB-3222.3 Expansion Stress Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NB-3222.4 Analysis for Cyclic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NB-3222.5 Thermal Stress Ratchet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
50
NB-3222.6 Deformation Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NB-3223 Level B Service Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NB-3224 Level C Service Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NB-3224.1 Primary Stress Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NB-3224.2 External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NB-3224.3 Special Stress Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NB-3224.5 Fatigue Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NB-3224.7 Piping Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NB-3225 Level D Service Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NB-3226 Testing Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NB-3227 Special Stress Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NB-3227.1 Bearing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NB-3227.2 Pure Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NB-3227.3 Progressive Distortion of Nonintegral Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NB-3227.4 Triaxial Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NB-3227.5 Nozzle Piping Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NB-3227.6 Applications of Elastic Analysis for Stresses Beyond the Yield Strength . . . . . . . . . . 88
NB-3227.7 Requirements for Specially Designed Welded Seals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
NB-3228 Applications of Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
NB-3228.1 Limit Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
NB-3228.2 Experimental Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
NB-3228.3 Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NB-3228.4 Shakedown Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NB-3228.5 Simplified Elastic–Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NB-3228.6 Reversing Dynamic Loading in Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
NB-3229 Design Stress Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
NB-3230 Stress Limits for Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NB-3231 Design Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NB-3232 Level A Service Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NB-3232.1 Average Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NB-3232.2 Maximum Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NB-3232.3 Fatigue Analysis of Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NB-3233 Level B Service Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NB-3236 Design Stress Intensity Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3300 Vessel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

NB-3310 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3311 Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3320 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3321 Design and Service Loadings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3322 Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3323 General Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3324 Tentative Pressure Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3324.1 Cylindrical Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3324.2 Spherical Shells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3330 Openings and Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3331 General Requirements for Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NB-3332 Reinforcement Requirements for Openings in Shells and Formed Heads . . . . . . . . . . 93
51
NB-3332.1 Openings Not Requiring Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NB-3332.2 Required Area of Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NB-3333 Reinforcement Required for Openings in Flat Heads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NB-3334 Limits of Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NB-3334.1 Limit of Reinforcement Along the Vessel Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NB-3334.2 Limit of Reinforcement Normal to the Vessel Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NB-3335 Metal Available for Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NB-3336 Strength of Reinforcing Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
NB-3337 Attachment of Nozzles and Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NB-3337.1 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NB-3337.2 Full Penetration Welded Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NB-3337.3 Partial Penetration Welded Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NB-3338 Fatigue Evaluation of Stresses in Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NB-3338.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NB-3338.2 Stress Index Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NB-3339 Alternative Rules for Nozzle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
NB-3339.1 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
NB-3339.2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
NB-3339.3 Required Reinforcement Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NB-3339.4 Limits of Reinforcing Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NB-3339.5 Strength of Reinforcing Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NB-3339.6 Transition Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
NB-3339.7 Stress Indices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
NB-3340 Analysis of Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NB-3350 Design of Welded Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NB-3351 Welded Joint Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NB-3351.1 Category A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NB-3351.2 Category B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NB-3351.3 Category C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NB-3351.4 Category D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NB-3352 Permissible Types of Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NB-3352.1 Joints of Category A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NB-3352.2 Joints of Category B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NB-3352.3 Joints of Category C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NB-3352.4 Joints of Category D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NB-3354 Structural Attachment Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NB-3355 Welding Grooves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NB-3357 Thermal Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NB-3360 Special Vessel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NB-3361 Category A or B Joints Between Sections of Unequal Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NB-3362 Bolted Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NB-3363 Access Openings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3364 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3365 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3400 Pump Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

NB-3410 General Requirements for Centrifugal Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3411 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3411.1 Applicability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3411.2 Exemptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3412.1 Acceptability of Large Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
52
NB-3412.2 Acceptability of Small Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3414 Design and Service Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3415 Loads From Connected Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3417 Earthquake Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3418 Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3419 Cladding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3420 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3421 Radially Split Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3422 Axially Split Casing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3423 Single and Double Volute Casings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3424 Seal Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3425 Typical Examples of Pump Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3430 Design Requirements for Centrifugal Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3431 Design of Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3432 Cutwater Tip Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
NB-3433 Reinforcement of Pump Casing Inlets and Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3433.1 Axially Oriented Inlets and Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3433.2 Radially Oriented Inlets and Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3433.3 Tangential Inlets and Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3433.4 Minimum Inlet and Outlet Wall Thicknesses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3434 Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3435 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3435.1 Piping Under External Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3435.2 Piping Under Internal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3436 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3437 Pump Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3438 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3440 Design of Specific Pump Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3441 Standard Pump Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3441.1 Design of Type A Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3441.2 Design of Type B Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3441.3 Design of Type C Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3441.4 Design of Type D Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NB-3441.5 Design of Type E Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NB-3441.6 Design of Type F Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NB-3442 Special Pump Types — Type J Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NB-3500 Valve Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

NB-3512 Acceptability of Large Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
NB-3512.1 Standard Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
NB-3512.2 Alternative Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
NB-3513 Acceptability of Small Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
NB-3513.1 Standard Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
NB-3513.2 Alternative Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
NB-3515 Acceptability of Metal Bellows and Metal Diaphragm Stem Sealed
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
NB-3524 Earthquake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
NB-3525 Levels A and B Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
53
NB-3526.1 Pressure–Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NB-3526.2 Pipe Reaction Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NB-3526.3 Primary Stress and Secondary Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NB-3530 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NB-3531 Pressure–Temperature Ratings and Hydrostatic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NB-3531.1 Pressure–Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NB-3531.2 Hydrostatic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NB-3531.3 Allowance for Variation From Design Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
NB-3532 Design Stress Intensity Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
NB-3533 Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
NB-3534 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
NB-3540 Design of Pressure-Retaining Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NB-3541 General Requirements for Body Wall Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NB-3542 Minimum Wall Thickness of Listed Pressure Rated Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NB-3543 Minimum Wall Thickness of Valves of Nonlisted Pressure Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NB-3544 Body Shape Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NB-3544.1 Fillets for External and Internal Intersections and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NB-3544.2 Penetrations of Pressure-Retaining Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NB-3544.3 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NB-3544.4 Body Internal Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NB-3544.5 Out-of-Roundness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NB-3544.6 Doubly Curved Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
NB-3544.7 Flat Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
NB-3544.8 Body End Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
NB-3544.9 Openings for Auxiliary Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
NB-3545 Body Primary and Secondary Stress Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
NB-3545.1 Primary Membrane Stress Due to Internal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
NB-3545.2 Secondary Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
NB-3545.3 Fatigue Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
NB-3546 Design Requirements for Valve Parts Other Than Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NB-3546.1 Body-to-Bonnet Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NB-3546.2 Valve Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NB-3546.3 Other Valve Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NB-3546.4 Fatigue Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NB-3550 Cyclic Loading Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NB-3551 Verification of Adequacy for Cyclic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
NB-3552 Excluded Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
NB-3553 Fatigue Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
NB-3554 Cyclic Stress Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
NB-3560 Design Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
NB-3562 Design Report for Valves Larger Than 4 in. Nominal Pipe Size (DN 100) . . . . . . . 131
NB-3563 Design Report Requirements for 4 in. and Smaller Nominal Pipe Size
(≤ DN 100) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
NB-3590 Pressure Relief Valve Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
NB-3591.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
NB-3591.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
NB-3591.3 Acceptability of Small Liquid Relief Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
NB-3591.4 Acceptability of Safety and Safety Relief Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
54
NB-3592.1 Design Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
NB-3592.2 Stress Limits for Specified Service Loadings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
NB-3592.3 Earthquake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3593 Special Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3593.1 Hydrostatic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3593.2 Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594 Design of Pressure Relief Valve Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.1 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.2 Bonnet (Yoke). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.3 Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.4 Body-to-Bonnet Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.5 Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.6 Spring Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.7 Spindle (Stem). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.8 Adjusting Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3594.9 Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
NB-3595 Design Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
NB-3600 Piping Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

NB-3611.1 Stress Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
NB-3611.2 Acceptability When Stresses Exceed Stress Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NB-3611.3 Conformance to NB-3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NB-3611.4 Dimensional Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NB-3611.5 Prevention of Nonductile Fracture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NB-3612 Pressure–Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NB-3612.1 Standard Piping Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NB-3612.2 Piping Products Without Specific Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NB-3612.4 Considerations for Local Conditions and Transients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NB-3613 Allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
NB-3613.1 Corrosion or Erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
NB-3613.2 Threading and Grooving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
NB-3613.3 Mechanical Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
NB-3622 Dynamic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
NB-3622.1 Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
NB-3622.2 Reversing Dynamic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
NB-3622.3 Vibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3622.4 Nonreversing Dynamic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3623 Weight Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3623.1 Live Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3623.2 Dead Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3624 Thermal Expansion and Contraction Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3624.1 Loadings, Displacements, and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3624.2 Analysis of Thermal Expansion and Contraction Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3624.3 Provision for Rapid Temperature Fluctuation Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3625 Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NB-3630 Piping Design and Analysis Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
55
NB-3640 Pressure Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
NB-3641 Straight Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
NB-3641.1 Straight Pipe Under Internal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
NB-3641.2 Straight Pipe Under External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
NB-3642 Curved Segments of Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
NB-3642.1 Pipe Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
NB-3642.2 Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
NB-3643 Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
NB-3643.2 Branch Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
NB-3643.3 Reinforcement for Openings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
NB-3644 Miters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
NB-3646 Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
NB-3647 Pressure Design of Flanged Joints and Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
NB-3647.1 Flanged Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
NB-3647.2 Permanent Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
NB-3647.3 Temporary Blanks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
NB-3648 Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
NB-3649 Pressure Design of Other Piping Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
NB-3649.1 Expansion Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
NB-3650 Analysis of Piping Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
NB-3651.1 Piping Products for Which Stress Indices Are Given . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
NB-3651.2 Piping Products for Which Stress Indices Are Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
NB-3651.3 Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
NB-3652 Consideration of Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
NB-3653 Consideration of Level A Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
NB-3653.1 Satisfaction of Primary Plus Secondary Stress Intensity Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
NB-3653.2 Satisfaction of Peak Stress Intensity Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
NB-3653.3 Alternating Stress Intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
NB-3653.4 Use of Design Fatigue Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
NB-3653.5 Cumulative Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
NB-3653.6 Simplified Elastic–Plastic Discontinuity Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
NB-3653.7 Thermal Stress Ratchet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NB-3654 Consideration of Level B Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NB-3654.1 Permissible Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NB-3654.2 Analysis of Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NB-3655 Consideration of Level C Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NB-3655.1 Permissible Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NB-3655.2 Analysis of Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
NB-3656 Consideration of Level D Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
NB-3657 Test Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3658 Analysis of Flanged Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3658.1 Design Limits, Levels A and B Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3658.2 Level C Service Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3658.3 Level D Service Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3658.4 Test Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3660 Design of Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3661 Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3661.2 Socket Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NB-3661.3 Partial Penetration Welds for Branch Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
56
NB-3670 Special Piping Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3671 Selection and Limitation of Nonwelded Piping Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3671.1 Flanged Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3671.2 Expanded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3671.3 Threaded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3671.4 Flared, Flareless, and Compression Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3671.5 Caulked Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3671.6 Brazed and Soldered Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3671.7 Sleeve Coupled and Other Patented Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
NB-3672 Expansion and Flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3672.1 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3672.2 Unit Thermal Expansion Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3672.3 Moduli of Elasticity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3672.4 Poisson’s Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3672.5 Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3672.6 Method of Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3672.7 Basic Assumptions and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3672.8 Cold Springing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3674 Design of Pipe Supporting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NB-3677 Pressure Relief Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
NB-3677.2 Piping to Pressure Relieving Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
NB-3677.3 Discharge Piping From Pressure Relieving Safety Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
NB-3680 Stress Indices and Flexibility Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
NB-3681 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
NB-3682 Definitions of Stress Indices and Flexibility Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
NB-3683 Stress Indices for Use With NB-3650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
NB-3683.1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
NB-3683.2 Applicability of Indices — General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
NB-3683.3 Straight Pipe Remote From Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
NB-3683.4 Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
NB-3683.5 Welded Transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
NB-3683.6 Concentric and Eccentric Reducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
NB-3683.7 Curved Pipe or Buttwelding Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
NB-3683.8 Branch Connections per NB-3643. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
NB-3683.9 Butt Welding Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
NB-3684 Stress Indices for Detailed Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
NB-3685 Curved Pipe or Welding Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NB-3685.1 Applicability of Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NB-3685.2 Nomenclature (Fig. NB-3685.2-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NB-3685.3 Stress From Stress Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NB-3685.4 Classification of Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NB-3686 Flexibility Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NB-3686.1 Straight Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NB-3686.2 Curved Pipe and Welding Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
NB-3686.3 Miter Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
NB-3686.4 Welding Tee or Branch Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
NB-3686.5 Branch Connections in Straight Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
NB-3690 Dimensional Requirements for Piping Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
NB-3691 Standard Piping Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
NB-3692 Nonstandard Piping Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
57
Figures
NB-3213-1 Examples of Reversing and Nonreversing Dynamic Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
NB-3221-1 Stress Categories and Limits of Stress Intensity for Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 78
NB-3222-1 Stress Categories and Limits of Stress Intensity for Level A and Level B
Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
NB-3224-1 Stress Categories and Limits of Stress Intensity for Level C
Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
NB-3332.2-1 Chart for Determining Value of F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NB-3338.2(a)-1 Direction of Stress Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
NB-3338.2(a)-2 Nozzle Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
NB-3339.1(b)-1 Examples of Acceptable Transition Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NB-3339.4-1 Limits of Reinforcing Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
NB-3351-1 Welded Joint Locations Typical of Categories A, B, C, and D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NB-3352-1 Typical Butt Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NB-3361-1 Category A and B Joints Between Sections of Unequal Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NB-3423-1 Typical Single Volute Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3423-2 Typical Double Volute Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NB-3433.4-1 Minimum Tangential Inlet and Outlet Wall Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NB-3441.1-1 Type A Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NB-3441.1-2 Type A Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NB-3441.2-1 Type B Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NB-3441.3-1 Type C Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NB-3441.3-2 Type C Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
NB-3441.4(a)-1 Type D Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
NB-3441.5-1 Type E Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
NB-3441.6(a)-1 Type F Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
NB-3544.1(a)-1 Fillets and Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
NB-3544.1(c)-1 Ring Grooves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
NB-3544.3-1 Lugs and Protuberances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
NB-3544.7-1 Flat Wall Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
NB-3545.1(a)-1 Pressure Area Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
NB-3545.2(a)-1 Critical Sections of Valve Bodies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
NB-3545.2(c)-1 Model for Determining Secondary Stress in Valve Crotch Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
NB-3545.2(c)-3 Thermal Stress Index Versus Thickness Continuity Run or Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
NB-3545.2(c)-4 Secondary Stress Index Versus Thickness Discontinuity Run or Branch. . . . . . . . . . . 127
NB-3545.2(c)-5 C4 Versus Te1 /te . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
NB-3545.2(c)-6 Stress Index for Thermal Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
NB-3591.1-1 Typical Pressure Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
NB-3591.1-2 Typical Pressure Relief and Safety Relief Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
NB-3594.3-1 Valve Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
NB-3622-1 Examples of Reversing and Nonreversing Dynamic Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
NB-3643.3(a)-1 Branch Connection Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
NB-3643.3(a)-2 Typical Reinforcement of Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
NB-3643.3(a)-3 Typical Reinforced Extruded Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
NB-3644(b)-1 Miter Joint Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
NB-3647.2-1 Types of Permanent Blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
NB-3653.2(b)-1 Decomposition of Temperature Distribution Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
NB-3683.1(c)-1 ........................................................................... 161
NB-3683.1(d)-1 ........................................................................... 162
NB-3683.6-1 ........................................................................... 165
NB-3684-1 Direction of Stress Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NB-3685.2-1 Elbow Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
NB-3686.1-1 ........................................................................... 170
58
NB-3686.2-1 ........................................................................... 170
NB-3686.5-1 Branch Connections in Straight Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tables
NB-3132-1 Dimensional Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
NB-3217-1 Classification of Stress Intensity in Vessels for Some Typical Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
NB-3217-2 Classification of Stress Intensity in Piping, Typical Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
NB-3228.5(b)-1 Values of m, n, and Tmax for Various Classes of Permitted Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NB-3338.2(c)-1 Stress Indices for Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
NB-3339.3-1 Required Minimum Reinforcing Area Ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NB-3339.7(c)-1 Stress Indices for Internal Pressure Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NB-3642.1(b)-1 Bend Radius Versus Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
NB-3681(a)-1 Stress Indices for Use With Equations in NB-3650. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
NB-3685.1-1 Curved Pipe or Welding End Elbows, Internal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
NB-3685.1-2 Curved Pipe or Welding End Elbows, Moment Loading (l ≥ 0.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
59
ARTICLE NB-3000
DESIGN
NB-3100 GENERAL DESIGN of the different zones may be based on their predicted
pressures.
NB-3110 LOADING CRITERIA
(b) All pressures referred to in this Article are to be
NB-3111 Loading Conditions taken as pounds per square inch, psi, above atmospheric
pressure, unless otherwise stated.
The loadings that shall be taken into account in
designing a component include, but are not limited to, NB-3112.2 Design Temperature
those in (a) through (g) below: (a) The specified Design Temperature shall be estab-
(a) internal and external pressure; lished in accordance with NCA-2142.1(b). It shall be
(b) impact loads, including rapidly fluctuating pres- used in computations involving the Design Pressure
sures; and coincidental Design Mechanical Loads. The actual
(c) weight of the component and normal contents metal temperature at the point under consideration shall
under operating or test conditions, including additional be used in all computations where the use of the
pressure due to static and dynamic head of liquids; specified service pressure is required.
(d) superimposed loads such as other components, (b) All temperatures referred to in this Subsection
operating equipment, insulation, corrosion resistant or are the metal temperatures expressed in degrees Fahren-
erosion resistant linings, and piping; heit (°F) unless otherwise stated.
(e) wind loads, snow loads, vibrations, and earth- (c) Where a component is heated by tracing, induc-
quake loads where specified; tion coils, jacketing, or internal heat generation, the
(f) reactions of supporting lugs, rings, saddles, or effect of such heating shall be incorporated in the
other types of supports; establishment of the Design Temperature.
(g) temperature effects.
NB-3112.3 Design Mechanical Loads. The specified
Design Mechanical Loads shall be established in accord-
ance with NCA-2142.1(c). They shall be used in con-
NB-3112 Design Loadings junction with the Design Pressure.
The Design Loadings shall be established in accord-
NB-3112.4 Design Stress Intensity Values. Design
ance with NCA-2142.1 and the following subparagraphs.
stress intensity values for materials are listed in Section
NB-3112.1 Design Pressure II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A, 2B, and 4. The material
(a) The specified internal and external Design Pres- shall not be used at metal and design temperatures above
sures to be used in this Subsection shall be established those for which stress intensity values are listed. The
in accordance with NCA-2142.1(a). They shall be used values in the Table may be interpolated for intermediate
in the computations made to show compliance with temperatures.
the stress intensity limits of NB-3221, NB-3227.1, NB-
3227.2, NB-3227.4, NB-3228.1, NB-3228.2, and NB-
NB-3113 Service Conditions
3231. The specified service pressure at the appropriate
time shall be used in the computations made to show Each service condition to which the components may
compliance with the stress intensity limits of NB-3222, be subjected shall be classified in accordance with NCA-
NB-3228.3, and NB-3232. When the occurrence of 2142 and Service Limits [NCA-2142.4(b)] designated in
different pressures during operation can be predicted the Design Specifications in such detail as will provide
for different zones of a component, the Design Pressure a complete basis for design, construction, and inspection
61
NB-3113 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB NB-3131
in accordance with this Article. The requirements of in both materials shall be limited to the values specified
(a) and (b) below shall also apply. in NB-3222.2 and NB-3222.4. However, when the
(a) Level B Conditions. The estimated duration of cladding is of the integrally bonded type and the
service conditions for which Level B Limits are specified nominal thickness of the cladding is 10% or less of
shall be included in the Design Specifications. the total thickness of the component, the presence of
(b) Level C Conditions. The total number of postu- the cladding may be neglected.
lated occurrences for all specified service conditions
NB-3122.4 Bearing Stresses. In satisfying NB-
for which Level C Limits are specified shall not cause
3227.1, the presence of cladding shall be included.
more than 25 stress cycles having an Sa value greater
than that for 106 cycles from the applicable fatigue
design curves of Figs. I-9.0. NB-3123 Welding
NB-3123.1 Dissimilar Welds. In satisfying the re-
quirements of this Subarticle, caution should be exer-
NB-3120 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS cised in design and construction involving dissimilar
NB-3121 Corrosion metals having different coefficients of thermal expansion
in order to avoid difficulties in service.
Material subject to thinning by corrosion, erosion,
mechanical abrasion, or other environmental effects NB-3123.2 Fillet Welded Attachments. Fillet welds
shall have provision made for these effects during the conforming to Fig. NB-4427-1 may be used for attach-
design or specified life of the component by a suitable ments to components except as limited by NB-4433.
increase in or addition to the thickness of the base Evaluation for cyclic loading shall be made in accord-
metal over that determined by the design formulas. ance with the appropriate Subarticle of NB-3000, and
Material added or included for these purposes need not shall include consideration of temperature differences
be of the same thickness for all areas of the component between the component and the attachment, and of
if different rates of attack are expected for the various expansion or contraction of the component produced
areas. It should be noted that the tests on which the by internal or external pressure.
design fatigue curves (Figs. I-9.0) are based did not
include tests in the presence of corrosive environments NB-3124 Environmental Effects
which might accelerate fatigue failure.
Changes in material properties may occur due to
environmental effects. In particular, fast neutron irradia-
NB-3122 Cladding tion (>1 MeV) above a certain level may result in
The rules of the following subparagraphs apply to significant increase in the brittle fracture transition
the analysis of clad components constructed of material temperature and deterioration in the resistance to fracture
permitted in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A at temperatures above the transition range (upper shelf
and 2B. energy). Therefore, nozzles or other structural disconti-
nuities in ferritic vessels should preferably not be placed
NB-3122.1 Primary Stresses. No structural strength in regions of high neutron flux.
shall be attributed to the cladding in satisfying NB-3221.
NB-3122.2 Design Dimensions. The dimensions NB-3125 Configuration
given in (a) and (b) below shall be used in the design
Accessibility to permit the examinations required by
of the component:
the Edition and Addenda of Section XI as specified
(a) for components subjected to internal pressure,
in the Design Specification for the component shall be
the inside diameter shall be taken at the nominal inner
provided in the design of the component.
face of the cladding;
(b) for components subjected to external pressure,
the outside diameter shall be taken at the outer face
NB-3130 GENERAL DESIGN RULES
of the base metal.
NB-3131 Scope
NB-3122.3 Secondary and Peak Stresses. In satis-
fying NB-3222.2 and NB-3222.4, the presence of the Design rules generally applicable to all components
cladding shall be considered with respect to both the are provided in the following paragraphs. The design
thermal analysis and the stress analysis. The stresses Subarticle for the specific component provides rules
62
NB-3131 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3133.2
applicable to that particular component. In case of in Section II, Part D, Subpart 3 for material
conflict between NB-3130 and the design rules for groups may differ from those values listed in
a particular component, the component design rules Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TM for
govern. specific materials. Section II, Part D, Subpart 3
values shall be applied only to external pressure
and axial compression design.
NB-3132 Dimensional Standards for Standard Ip available moment of inertia of the combined
Products ring-shell section about its neutral axis, parallel
Dimensions of standard products shall comply with to the axis of the shell, in.4 The width of the shell
the standards and specifications listed in Table NB- which is taken as contributing to the combined
3132-1 when the standard or specification is referenced moment of inertia shall not be greater than 1.10
in the specific design Subarticle. However, compliance √DoTn and shall be taken as lying one-half on
with these standards does not replace or eliminate the each side of the centroid of the ring. Portions
requirements for stress analysis when called for by the of shell plates shall not be considered as contrib-
design Subarticle for a specific component. uting area to more than one stiffening ring.
Isp required moment of inertia of the combined
ring-shell section about its neutral axis parallel
NB-3133 Components Under External Pressure
to the axis of the shell, in.4
NB-3133.1 General. Rules are given in this paragraph Lp total length, in., of a tube between tubesheets,
for determining the stresses under external pressure or the design length of a vessel section, taken
loading in spherical and cylindrical shells with or as the largest of the following:
without stiffening rings, and tubular products consisting (1) the distance between head tangent
of pipes, tubes, and fittings. Charts for determining the lines plus one-third of the depth of each head
stresses in shells, hemispherical heads, and tubular if there are no stiffening rings;
products are given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 3. (2) the greatest center-to-center distance
between any two adjacent stiffening rings; or
98 NB-3133.2 Nomenclature. The symbols used in this
(3) the distance from the center of the first
paragraph are defined as follows:
Ap factor determined from Fig. G in Section II, Part stiffening ring to the head tangent line plus one-
D, Subpart 3 and used to enter the applicable third of the depth of the head, all measured
material chart in Section II, Part D, Subpart 3. parallel to the axis of the vessel, in.
For the case of cylinders having Do /T values Lsp one-half the distance, in., from the center line
less than 10, see NB-3133.3(b). Also, factor of the stiffening ring to the next line of support
determined from the applicable chart in Section on one side, plus one-half of the center line
II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the material used in a distance to the next line of support on the other
stiffening ring, corresponding to the factor B side of the stiffening ring, both measured paral-
and the design metal temperature for the shell lel to the axis of the component. A line of sup-
under consideration. port is:
Asp cross-sectional area of a stiffening ring, sq in. (1) a stiffening ring that meets the require-
Bp factor determined from the applicable chart in ments of this paragraph;
Section II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the material (2) a circumferential line on a head at one-
used in a shell or stiffening ring at the design third the depth of the head from the head tangent
metal temperature, psi line; or
Dop outside diameter of the cylindrical shell course (3) circumferential connection to a jacket
or tube under consideration, in. for a jacketed section of a cylindrical shell.
Ep modulus of elasticity of material at Design Tem- Pp external design pressure, psi (gage or absolute,
perature, psi. For external pressure and axial as required)
compression design in accordance with this Sec- Pap allowable external pressure, psi (gage or abso-
tion, the modulus of elasticity to be used shall lute, as required)
be taken from the applicable materials chart in Rp inside radius of spherical shell, in.
Section II, Part D, Subpart 3. (Interpolation may Sp the lesser of 1.5 times the stress intensity at
be made between lines for intermediate temper- design metal temperature from Section II, Part
atures.) The modulus of elasticity values shown D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B, or 0.9 times
63
Table NB-3132-1 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB
TABLE NB-3132-1
DIMENSIONAL STANDARDS
Standard Designation
Pipe and Tubes

Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B36.10-1985
Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B36.19-1985
Fittings, Flanges, and Gaskets

Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B16.5-1988
Factory Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B16.9-1986 [Note (1)]
Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B16.11-1980
Ring-Joint Gaskets and Grooves for Steel Pipe Flanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B16.20-1984
Nonmetallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B16.21-1978
Buttwelding Ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B16.25-1986
Wrought Steel Buttwelding Short Radius Elbows and Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B16.28-1986 [Note (2)]
Refrigeration Flare Type Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAE J513 F-1981
Stainless Steel Buttwelding Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSS SP-43-1982(R1986)
Steel Pipeline Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSS SP-44-1985
Factory Made Buttwelding Fittings for Class 1
Nuclear Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSS SP-87-1982 [Note (3)]
Large Diameter Carbon Steel Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . API 605-1980
Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AWWA C207-1978
Bolting
Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Askew Head Bolts,
Hex Cap Screws, and Lag Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B18.2.1-1981
Square and Hex Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B18.2.2-1987
Socket Cap, Shoulder, and Set Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B18.3-1986
Threads
Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B1.1-1982
Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B1.20.1-1983
Dryseal Pipe Threads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B1.20.3-1976(R1982)
Gaging for Dryseal Piping Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B1.20.5-1978
Valves
Valves — Flanged and Buttwelding End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B16.34-1988
NOTES:
(1) Analysis per ANSI B16.9, paragraph 2.2, is acceptable only for caps and reducers.
(2) Analysis per ANSI B16.28, paragraph 2.2, is not acceptable.
(3) Analysis per MSS-SP-87 is acceptable only for caps and reducers.
64
NB-3133.2 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3133.4
the tabulated yield strength at design metal tem- Step 7: For values of A falling to the left of the
perature from Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, applicable material /temperature line, the
Table Y-1, psi value of Pa can be calculated using the
Tp minimum required thickness of cylindrical shell following formula:
or tube, or spherical shell, in.
Tnp nominal thickness used, less corrosion allow- 2AE
Pa p
ance, of cylindrical shell or tube, in. 3Do / T
NB-3133.3 Cylindrical Shells and Tubular Step 8: Compare Pa with P. If Pa is smaller than
Products P, select a larger value for T and repeat the
(a) The minimum thickness of cylindrical shells or design procedure until a value for Pa is
tubular products under external pressure having Do /T obtained that is equal to or greater than P.
values equal to or greater than 10 shall be determined (b) The minimum thickness of cylindrical shells or
by the procedure given in Steps 1 through 8 below. tubular products under external pressure having Do /T
Step 1: Assume a value for T. Determine the ratios values less than 10 shall be determined by the procedure
L /Do and Do /T. given in Steps 1 through 4 below.
Step 2: Enter Fig. G in Section II, Part D, Subpart Step 1: Using the same procedure as given in (a)
3 at the value of L /Do determined in Step above, obtain the value of B. For values of
1. For values of L /Do greater than 50, enter Do /T less than 4, the value of factor A can
the chart at a value of L /Do of 50. For be calculated using the following formula:
values of L /Do less than 0.05, enter the
chart at a value of L /Do of 0.05. 1.1
Ap
Step 3: Move horizontally to the line for the value (Do / T)2
of Do /T determined in Step 1. Interpolation
may be made for intermediate values of For values of A greater than 0.10 use a value
Do /T. From this intersection move vertically of 0.10.
downward and read the value of factor A. Step 2: Using the value of B obtained in Step 1,
Step 4: Using the value of A calculated in Step 3, calculate a value Pa1 using the following
enter the applicable material chart in Section formula:
II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the mate-
1D / T − 0.08332 B
rial /temperature under consideration. Move 2.167
Pa1 p
vertically to an intersection with the o
material /temperature line for the design tem-
perature. Interpolation may be made between Step 3: Calculate a value Pa2 using the following
lines for intermediate temperatures. In cases formula:
where the value at A falls to the right of
1 2
the end of the material /temperature line, 2S 1
Pa2 p 1−
assume an intersection with the horizontal Do / T Do / T
projection of the upper end of the
material /temperature line. For values of A Step 4: The smaller of the values ofPa1 calculated
falling to the left of the material line, see in Step 2 or Pa2 calculated in Step 3 shall
Step 7. be used for the maximum allowable external
Step 5: From the intersection obtained in Step 4 pressure Pa . Compare Pa with P. If Pa is
move horizontally to the right and read the smaller than P, select a larger value for T
value of B. and repeat the design procedure until a value
Step 6: Using this value of B, calculate the maximum for Pa is obtained that is equal to or greater
allowable external pressure Pa using the fol- than P.
lowing formula:
NB-3133.4 Spherical Shells. The minimum required
thickness of a spherical shell under external pressure,
either seamless or of built-up construction with butt
4B joints, shall be determined by the procedure given in
Pa p
3Do / T Steps 1 through 6 below.
65
NB-3133.4 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB NB-3133.6
Step 1: Assume a value for T and calculate the value shall be determined by the procedure given in Steps
of factor A using the following formula: 1 through 6 below.
Step 1: Assuming that the shell has been designed
0.125 and Do, Ls , and Tn are known, select a
Ap
R/T member to be used for the stiffening ring
and determine its area A and the value of
Step 2: Using the value of A calculated in Step 1, I defined in NB-3133.2. Then calculate B
enter the applicable material chart in Section by the formula:
II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the material under
1 2
consideration. Move vertically to an intersec- 3 PDo
Bp
tion with the material /temperature line for 4 Tn + As / Ls
the design temperature. Interpolation may be
made between lines for intermediate tempera- Step 2: Enter the right-hand side of the applicable
tures. In cases where the value of A falls material chart in Section II, Part D, Subpart
to the right of the end of the material/ 3 for the material under consideration at the
temperature line, assume an intersection with value of B determined in Step 1. If different
the horizontal projection of the upper end materials are used for the shell and stiffening
of the material /temperature line. For values ring, then use the material chart resulting
at A falling to the left of the material/ in the larger value for factor A in Steps 4
temperature line, see Step 5. or 5 below.
Step 3: From the intersection obtained in Step 2, Step 3: Move horizontally to the left to the ma-
move horizontally to the right and read the terial /temperature line for the design metal
value of factor B. temperature. For values of B falling below the
Step 4: Using the value of B obtained in Step 3, left end of the material /temperature line, see
calculate the value of the maximum allow- Step 5.
able external pressure Pa using the following Step 4: Move vertically to the bottom of the chart
formula: and read the value of A.
Step 5: For values of B falling below the left end of
B
Pa p the material /temperature line for the design
R/T temperature, the value of A can be calculated
using the following formula:
Step 5: For values of A falling to the left of the
applicable material /temperature line for the
A p 2B / E
Design Temperature, the value of Pa can
be calculated using the following formula:
Step 6: If the required Is is greater than the computed
0.0625E moment of inertia I for the combined-ring
Pa p shell section selected in Step 1, a new section
(R / T )2
with a larger moment of inertia must be
selected and a new Is determined. If the
Step 6: Compare Pa obtained in Step 4 or 5 with
required Is is smaller than the computed I
P. If Pa is smaller than P, select a larger
for the section selected in Step 1, that section
value for T, and repeat the design procedure
should be satisfactory.
until a value for Pa is obtained that is equal
to or greater than P. (b) Stiffening rings may be attached to either the
NB-3133.5 Stiffening Rings for Cylindrical Shells outside or the inside of the component by continuous
(a) The required moment of inertia of the combined welding.
ring-shell section is given by the formula: NB-3133.6 Cylinders Under Axial Compression.
The maximum allowable compressive stress to be used
Do2 Ls (T + As / Ls )A in the design of cylindrical shells and tubular products
Is p
10.9 subjected to loadings that produce longitudinal compres-
sive stresses in the shell or wall shall be the lesser of
The available moment of inertia I for a stiffening ring the values given in (a) or (b) below:
66
NB-3133.6 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3137
(a) the Sm value for the applicable material at design tube, using the selected values of T and R.
temperature given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, If the value of B is smaller than the computed
Tables 2A and 2B; compressive stress, a greater value of T must
(b) the value of the factor B determined from the be selected and the design procedure repeated
applicable chart contained in Section II, Part D, Subpart until a value of B is obtained which is
3, using the following definitions for the symbols on greater than the compressive stress computed
the charts: for the loading on the cylindrical shell or
Rp inside radius of the cylindrical shell or tubular tube.
product, in.
Tp minimum required thickness of the shell or tu-
bular product, exclusive of the corrosion allow- NB-3134 Leak Tightness
ance, in. Where a system leak tightness greater than that
The value of B shall be determined from the applicable required or demonstrated by a hydrostatic test is re-
chart contained in Section II, Part D, Subpart 3 as quired, the leak tightness requirements for each compo-
given in Steps 1 through 5 below. nent shall be set forth in the Design Specifications.
Step 1: Using the selected values of T and R, calculate
the value of factor A using the following
formula: NB-3135 Attachments
(a) Except as permitted in (d), (e), or (f) below,
0.125 attachments and connecting welds within the jurisdic-
Ap
R/T tional boundary of the component as defined in NB-
1130 shall meet the stress limits of the component or
Step 2: Using the value of A calculated in Step 1, NB-3200.
enter the applicable material chart in Section (b) The design of the component shall include consid-
II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the material under eration of the localized interaction effects and loads
consideration. Move vertically to an intersec- transmitted through the attachment to and from the
tion with the material /temperature line for pressure-retaining portion of the component. Localized
the design temperature. Interpolation may be interaction effects include thermal stresses, stress con-
made between lines for intermediate tempera- centrations, and restraint of the pressure-retaining por-
tures. In cases where the value at A falls tion of the component.
to the right of the end of the material/ (c) The first welded structural attachment within 2t
temperature line, assume an intersection with of the pressure-retaining portion of the component,
the horizontal projection of the upper end where t is the nominal thickness of the pressure-
of the material /temperature line. For values retaining material, shall be evaluated for cyclic loading.
of A falling to the left of the material/ Evaluation shall be in accordance with the appropriate
temperature line, see Step 4. Subarticle of NB-3000 and shall be made at the juncture
Step 3: From the intersection obtained in Step 2, of the attachment to the component.
move horizontally to the right and read the (d) Beyond 2t the appropriate design rules of NF-
value of factor B. This is the maximum 3000 may be used as a substitute for the design rules
allowable compressive stress for the values of NB-3000 for cast and forged portions of attachments
of T and R used in Step 1. which are in the component support load path.
Step 4: For values of A falling to the left of the (e) Nonstructural attachments shall meet the require-
applicable material /temperature line, the ments of NB-4435.
value of B shall be calculated using the (f) Beyond 2t the appropriate design rules of NG-
following formula: 3000 may be used as a substitute for the design rules
of NB-3000 for portions of cast or forged attachments
AE which are core support structures.
Bp
2
NB-3137 Reinforcement for Openings

Step 5: Compare the value of B determined in Step
3 or 4 with the computed longitudinal com- The requirements applicable to vessels and piping
pressive stress in the cylindrical shell or are contained in NB-3330 and NB-3643, respectively.
67
NB-3200 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB NB-3213.7
NB-3200 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS NB-3213.1 Stress Intensity.2 Stress intensity is the

equivalent intensity of combined stress, or, in short,
NB-3210 DESIGN CRITERIA
the stress intensity is defined as twice the maximum
NB-3211 Requirements for Acceptability shear stress. In other words, the stress intensity is the
difference between the algebraically largest principal
The requirements for the acceptability of a design
stress and the algebraically smallest principal stress at
by analysis are given in (a) through (d) below.
a given point. Tensile stresses are considered positive
(a) The design shall be such that stress intensities
and compressive stresses are considered negative.
will not exceed the limits described in this Subarticle
and in NB-3100 and tabulated in Section II, Part D, NB-3213.2 Gross Structural Discontinuity. Gross
Subpart 1, Tables 2A, 2B, and 4. structural discontinuity is a geometric or material discon-
(b) The design details shall conform to the rules tinuity which affects the stress or strain distribution
given in NB-3100 and those given in the Subarticle through the entire wall thickness of the pressure re-
applicable to the specific component. taining member. Gross discontinuity type stresses are
(c) For configurations where compressive stresses those portions of the actual stress distributions that
occur, in addition to the requirements in (a) and (b) produce net bending and membrane force resultants
above, the critical buckling stress shall be taken into when integrated through the wall thickness. Examples
account. For the special case of external pressure, NB- of gross structural discontinuities are head-to-shell and
3133 applies. flange-to-shell junctions, nozzles (NB-3331), and junc-
(d) Protection against nonductile fracture shall be tions between shells of different diameters or thick-
provided by satisfying one of the following provisions: nesses.
(1) performing an evaluation of service and test
NB-3213.3 Local Structural Discontinuity. Local
conditions by methods similar to those contained in
structural discontinuity is a geometric or material discon-
Appendix G; or
tinuity which affects the stress or strain distribution
(2) for piping, pump, and valve material thickness
through a fractional part of the wall thickness. The
greater than 21/2 in. (64 mm) establishing a lowest
stress distribution associated with a local discontinuity
service temperature1 that is not lower than RTNDT (NB-
causes only very localized types of deformation or
2331) + 100°F;
strain and has no significant effect on the shell type
(3) for piping, pump, and valve material thickness
discontinuity deformations. Examples are small fillet
equal to or less than 21/2 in. (64 mm), the requirements
radii, small attachments, and partial penetration welds.
of NB-2332(a) shall be met at or below the lowest
service temperature as established in the design specifi- NB-3213.4 Normal Stress. Normal stress is the
cation. component of stress normal to the plane of reference.
This is also referred to as direct stress. Usually the
distribution of normal stress is not uniform through
NB-3212 Basis for Determining Stresses the thickness of a part, so this stress is considered to
be made up in turn of two components, one of which
The theory of failure, used in the rules of this
is uniformly distributed and equal to the average value
Subsection for combining stresses, is the maximum
of stress across the thickness under consideration, and
shear stress theory. The maximum shear stress at a
the other of which varies from this average value with
point is equal to one-half the difference between the
the location across the thickness.
algebraically largest and the algebraically smallest of
the three principal stresses at the point. NB-3213.5 Shear Stress. Shear stress is the compo-
nent of stress tangent to the plane of reference.
NB-3213.6 Membrane Stress. Membrane stress is
NB-3213 Terms Relating to Stress Analysis
the component of normal stress which is uniformly
Terms used in this Subsection relating to stress distributed and equal to the average value of stress
analysis are defined in the following subparagraphs. across the thickness of the section under consideration.
NB-3213.7 Bending Stress. Bending stress is the
1 Lowest service temperature is the minimum temperature of the fluid variable component of normal stress described in NB-
retained by the component or, alternatively, the calculated volumetric
average metal temperature expected during normal operation, when-
ever pressure within the component exceeds 20% of the pre-opera- 2 This definition of stress intensity is not related to the definition of
tional system hydrostatic test pressure. stress intensity applied in the field of Fracture Mechanics.
68
NB-3213.7 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3213.13
3213.4. The variation may or may not be linear across and R2 are the minimum midsurface radii of curvature
the thickness. at these regions where the membrane stress intensity
exceeds 1.1Sm). Discrete regions of local primary mem-
NB-3213.8 Primary Stress. Primary stress is any
brane stress intensity, such as those resulting from
normal stress or a shear stress developed by an imposed
concentrated loads acting on brackets, where the mem-
loading which is necessary to satisfy the laws of
brane stress intensity exceeds 1.1Sm, shall be spaced
equilibrium of external and internal forces and moments.
so that there is no overlapping of the areas in which
The basic characteristic of a primary stress is that it
the membrane stress intensity exceeds 1.1Sm.
is not self-limiting. Primary stresses which considerably
exceed the yield strength will result in failure or, at NB-3213.11 Peak Stress. Peak stress is that incre-
least, in gross distortion. A thermal stress is not classified ment of stress which is additive to the primary plus
as a primary stress. Primary membrane stress is divided secondary stresses by reason of local discontinuities or
into general and local categories. A general primary local thermal stress [NB-3213.13(b)] including the ef-
membrane stress is one which is so distributed in the fects, if any, of stress concentrations. The basic charac-
structure that no redistribution of load occurs as a teristic of a peak stress is that it does not cause any
result of yielding. Examples of primary stresses are: noticeable distortion and is objectionable only as a
(a) general membrane stress in a circular cylindrical possible source of a fatigue crack or a brittle fracture.
or a spherical shell due to internal pressure or to A stress which is not highly localized falls into this
distributed live loads; category if it is of a type which cannot cause noticeable
(b) bending stress in the central portion of a flat distortion. Examples of peak stresses are:
head due to pressure. (a) the thermal stress in the austenitic steel cladding
NB-3213.9 Secondary Stress. Secondary stress is a of a carbon steel component;
normal stress or a shear stress developed by the con- (b) certain thermal stresses which may cause fatigue
straint of adjacent material or by self-constraint of the but not distortion;
structure. The basic characteristic of a secondary stress (c) the stress at a local structural discontinuity;
is that it is self-limiting. Local yielding and minor (d) surface stresses produced by thermal shock.
distortions can satisfy the conditions which cause the NB-3213.12 Load Controlled Stresses. Load con-
stress to occur and failure from one application of the trolled stresses are the stresses resulting from application
stress is not to be expected. Examples of secondary of a loading, such as internal pressure, inertial loads,
stresses are: or the effects of gravity, whose magnitude is not reduced
(a) general thermal stress [NB-3213.13(a)]; as a result of displacement.
(b) bending stress at a gross structural discontinuity.
NB-3213.13 Thermal Stress. Thermal stress is a
NB-3213.10 Local Primary Membrane Stress.
self-balancing stress produced by a nonuniform distribu-
Cases arise in which a membrane stress produced by
tion of temperature or by differing thermal coefficients
pressure or other mechanical loading and associated
of expansion. Thermal stress is developed in a solid
with a discontinuity would, if not limited, produce
body whenever a volume of material is prevented from
excessive distortion in the transfer of load to other
assuming the size and shape that it normally should
portions of the structure. Conservatism requires that
under a change in temperature. For the purpose of
such a stress be classified as a local primary membrane
establishing allowable stresses, two types of thermal
stress even though it has some characteristics of a
stress are recognized, depending on the volume or area
secondary stress. A stressed region may be considered
in which distortion takes place, as described in (a) and
local if the distance over which the membrane stress
(b) below.
intensity exceeds 1.1Sm does not extend in the meridio-
(a) General thermal stress is associated with distor-
nal direction more than 1.0 √ Rt, where R is the mini- tion of the structure in which it occurs. If a stress of
mum midsurface radius of curvature and t is the mini- this type, neglecting stress concentrations, exceeds twice
mum thickness in the region considered. Regions of the yield strength of the material, the elastic analysis
local primary stress intensity involving axisymmetric may be invalid and successive thermal cycles may
membrane stress distributions which exceed 1.1Sm shall produce incremental distortion. Therefore this type is
not be closer in the meridional direction than 2.5 classified as secondary stress in Table NB-3217-1.
√ Rt, where R is defined as (R1 + R2 ) /2 and t is Examples of general thermal stresses are:
defined as (t1 + t2 ) /2 (where t1 and t2 are the minimum (1) stress produced by an axial temperature distri-
thicknesses at each of the regions considered, and R1 bution in a cylindrical shell;
69
(2) stress produced by the temperature difference occur between a fixed attachment and connected piping
between a nozzle and the shell to which it is attached; if the two members were separated and permitted to
(3) the equivalent linear stress3 produced by the move.
radial temperature distribution in a cylindrical shell.
(b) Local thermal stress is associated with almost NB-3213.19 Expansion Stresses. Expansion stresses
complete suppression of the differential expansion and are those stresses resulting from restraint of free end
thus produces no significant distortion. Such stresses displacement of the piping system.
shall be considered only from the fatigue standpoint NB-3213.20 Deformation. Deformation of a compo-
and are therefore classified as local stresses in Table nent part is an alteration of its shape or size.
NB-3217-1. In evaluating local thermal stresses the
procedures of NB-3227.6(b) shall be used. Examples NB-3213.21 Inelasticity. Inelasticity is a general
of local thermal stresses are: characteristic of material behavior in which the material
(1) the stress in a small hot spot in a vessel wall; does not return to its original shape and size after
(2) the difference between the actual stress and removal of all applied loads. Plasticity and creep are
the equivalent linear stress resulting from a radial special cases of inelasticity.
temperature distribution in a cylindrical shell;
NB-3213.22 Creep. Creep is the special case of
(3) the thermal stress in a cladding material which
inelasticity that relates to the stress-induced, time-depen-
has a coefficient of expansion different from that of
dent deformation under load. Small time-dependent
the base metal.
deformations may occur after the removal of all ap-
NB-3213.14 Total Stress. Total stress is the sum plied loads.
of the primary, secondary, and peak stress contributions.
Recognition of each of the individual contributions is NB-3213.23 Plasticity. Plasticity is the special case
essential to establishment of appropriate stress limita- of inelasticity in which the material undergoes time-
tions. independent nonrecoverable deformation.
NB-3213.15 Operational Cycle. Operational cycle NB-3213.24 Plastic Analysis. Plastic analysis is that
is defined as the initiation and establishment of new method which computes the structural behavior under
conditions followed by a return to the conditions which given loads considering the plasticity characteristics of
prevailed at the beginning of the cycle. The types of the materials, including strain hardening and the stress
operating conditions which may occur are further de- redistribution occurring in the structure.
fined in NB-3113. NB-3213.25 Plastic Analysis — Collapse Load. A
NB-3213.16 Stress Cycle. Stress cycle is a condition plastic analysis may be used to determine the collapse
in which the alternating stress difference [NB-3222.4(e)] load for a given combination of loads on a given
goes from an initial value through an algebraic maxi- structure. The following criterion for determination of
mum value and an algebraic minimum value and then the collapse load shall be used. A load–deflection or
returns to the initial value. A single operational cycle load–strain curve is plotted with load as the ordinate
may result in one or more stress cycles. Dynamic and deflection or strain as the abscissa. The angle that
effects shall also be considered as stress cycles. the linear part of the load–deflection or load–strain
curve makes with the ordinate is called u. A second
NB-3213.17 Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor. straight line, hereafter called the collapse limit line, is
Fatigue strength reduction factor is a stress intensifica- drawn through the origin so that it makes an angle
tion factor which accounts for the effect of a local f p tan−1 (2 tan u ) with the ordinate. The collapse
structural discontinuity (stress concentration) on the load is the load at the intersection of the load–deflection
fatigue strength. Values for some specific cases, based or load–strain curve and the collapse limit line. If this
on experiment, are given in NB-3338 and NB-3339. method is used, particular care should be given to
In the absence of experimental data, the theoretical ensure that the strains or deflections that are used are
stress concentration factor may be used. indicative of the load carrying capacity of the structure.
NB-3213.18 Free End Displacement. Free end dis-
NB-3213.26 Plastic Instability Load. The plastic
placement consists of the relative motions that would
instability load for members under predominantly tensile
3 Equivalent
or compressive loading is defined as that load at which
linear stress is defined as the linear stress distribution
which has the same net bending moment as the actual stress distri- unbounded plastic deformation can occur without an
bution. increase in load. At the plastic tensile instability load,
70
NB-3213.26 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3215
the true stress in the material increases faster than inelastic deformation is absent. Elastic shakedown is
strain hardening can accommodate. the case in which the subsequent response is elastic.
NB-3213.27 Limit Analysis. Limit analysis is a NB-3213.35 Reversing Dynamic Loads. Reversing
special case of plastic analysis in which the material dynamic loads (Fig. NB-3213-1) are those loads which
is assumed to be ideally plastic (nonstrain-hardening). cycle about a mean value and include building filtered
In limit analysis, the equilibrium and flow characteristics loads, earthquake, and the reflected waves in a piping
at the limit state are used to calculate the collapse system due to flow transients resulting from sudden
load. The two bounding methods which are used in opening or closure of valves.
limit analysis are the lower bound approach, which is NB-3213.36 Nonreversing Dynamic Loads. Nonre-
associated with a statically admissible stress field, and versing dynamic loads (Fig. NB-3213-1) are those loads
the upper bound approach, which is associated with a which do not cycle about a mean value and include
kinematically admissible velocity field. For beams and the initial thrust force due to sudden opening or closure
frames, the term mechanism is commonly used in lieu of valves and waterhammer resulting from entrapped
of kinematically admissible velocity field. water in two-phase flow systems.
NB-3213.28 Limit Analysis — Collapse Load. The
methods of limit analysis are used to compute the NB-3214 Stress Analysis
maximum load that a structure assumed to be made
of ideally plastic material can carry. At this load, which A detailed stress analysis of all major structural
is termed the collapse load, the deformations of the components shall be prepared in sufficient detail to
structure increase without bound. show that each of the stress limitations of NB-3220 and
NB-3230 is satisfied when the component is subjected to
NB-3213.29 Collapse Load — Lower Bound. If, the loadings of NB-3110. As an aid to the evaluation
for a given load, any system of stresses can be found of these stresses, formulas and methods for the solution
which everywhere satisfies equilibrium, and nowhere of certain recurring problems have been placed in
exceeds the material yield strength, the load is at or Appendix A.
below the collapse load. This is the lower bound
theorem of limit analysis which permits calculations
of a lower bound to the collapse load. NB-3215 Derivation of Stress Intensities
One requirement for the acceptability of a design
NB-3213.30 Plastic Hinge. A plastic hinge is an
(NB-3210) is that the calculated stress intensities shall
idealized concept used in Limit Analysis. In a beam
not exceed specified allowable limits. These limits differ
or a frame, a plastic hinge is formed at the point where
depending on the stress category (primary, secondary,
the moment, shear, and axial force lie on the yield
etc.) from which the stress intensity is derived. This
interaction surface. In plates and shells, a plastic hinge
paragraph describes the procedure for the calculation
is formed where the generalized stresses lie on the
of the stress intensities which are subject to the specified
yield surface.
limits. The steps in the procedure are stipulated in (a)
NB-3213.31 Strain Limiting Load. When a limit through (e) below.
is placed upon a strain, the load associated with the (a) At the point on the component which is being
strain limit is called the strain limiting load. investigated, choose an orthogonal set of coordinates,
such as tangential, longitudinal, and radial, and designate
NB-3213.32 Test Collapse Load. Test collapse load them by the subscripts t, l, and r. The stress components
is the collapse load determined by tests according to in these directions are then designated st , sl, and sr
the criteria given in II-1430. for direct stresses and tlt , tlr , and trt for shear stresses.
NB-3213.33 Ratcheting. Ratcheting is a progressive (b) Calculate the stress components for each type of
incremental inelastic deformation or strain which can loading to which the part will be subjected, and assign
occur in a component that is subjected to variations each set of stress values to one or a group of the
of mechanical stress, thermal stress, or both. following categories:4
(1) general primary membrane stress Pm (NB-
NB-3213.34 Shakedown. Shakedown of a structure 3213.8);
occurs if, after a few cycles of load application, ratch-
eting ceases. The subsequent structural response is 4 SeeTables NB-3217-1 and NB-3217-2 and Note (2) of Fig. NB-
elastic, or elastic–plastic, and progressive incremental 3221-1.
71
Fig. NB-3213-1 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB
FIG. NB-3213-1 EXAMPLES OF REVERSING AND NONREVERSING DYNAMIC LOADS
72
NB-3215 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3216.2
(2) local primary membrane stress PL (NB- complete stress cycle taking into account both the gross
3213.10); and local structural discontinuities and the thermal
(3) primary bending stress Pb (NB-3213.7 and NB- effects which vary during the cycle. These are designated
3213.8); as s1, s2, and s3 for later identification.
(4) expansion stress Pe (NB-3213.19); (b) Stress Differences. Determine the stress differ-
(5) secondary stress Q (NB-3213.9); ences S12ps1− s2, S23ps2− s3, andS31ps3− s1 versus
(6) peak stress F (NB-3213.11). NB-3217 provides time for the complete cycle. In what follows, the symbol
guidance for this step. Sij is used to represent any one of these three stress
(c) For each category, calculate the algebraic sum differences.
of the st values which result from the different types (c) Alternating Stress Intensity. Determine the ex-
of loadings and similarly for the other five stress tremes of the range through which each stress difference
components. Certain combinations of the categories Sij fluctuates and find the absolute magnitude of this
must also be considered. range for each Sij. Call this magnitude Srij and let
(d) Translate the stress components for the t, l, and Salt ijp0.5Srij. The alternating stress intensity Salt is the
r directions into principal stresses s1, s2, and s3. In largest Salt ij value.
many pressure component calculations, the t, l, and r
directions may be so chosen that the shear stress
components are zero and s1, s2 , and s3 are identical
to st , sl, and sr . NB-3216.2 Varying Principal Stress Direction. For
(e) Calculate the stress differences S12, S23, and S31 any case in which the directions of the principal stresses
from the relations: at the point being considered do change during the
stress cycle, it is necessary to use the more general
S12 p s1 − s2 procedure of (a) through (e) below.
S23 p s2 − s3 (a) Consider the values of the six stress components
S31 p s3 − s1
st , sl, sr , tlt , tlr , and trt versus time for the complete
stress cycle, taking into account both the gross and
The stress intensity S is the largest absolute value of
S12, S23, and S31. local structural discontinuities and the thermal effects
which vary during the cycle.
NOTE: Membrane stress intensity is derived from the stress compo- (b) Choose a point in time when the conditions are
nents averaged across the thickness of the section. The averaging one of the extremes for the cycle (either maximum or
shall be performed at the component level in (b) or (c) above.
minimum, algebraically) and identify the stress compo-
nents at this time by the subscript i. In most cases it
will be possible to choose at least one time during the
NB-3216 Derivation of Stress Differences
cycle when the conditions are known to be extreme.
If the specified operation of the component does not In some cases it may be necessary to try different
meet the conditions of NB-3222.4(d), the ability of the points in time to find the one which results in the
component to withstand the specified cyclic service largest value of alternating stress intensity.
without fatigue failure shall be determined as provided (c) Subtract each of the six stress components sti,
in NB-3222.4(e). The determination shall be made on sli, etc., from the corresponding stress components st ,
the basis of the stresses at a point of the component, sl, etc., at each point in time during cycle and call
and the allowable stress cycles shall be adequate for the resulting components s ′t , s ′l, etc.
the specified service at every point. Only the stress (d) At each point in time during the cycle, calculate
differences due to cyclic service loadings as specified the principal stresses s ′1, s ′2, and s ′3 derived from
in the Design Specification need be considered. the six stress components s′t , s ′l, etc. Note that the
NB-3216.1 Constant Principal Stress Direction. For directions of the principal stresses may change during
any case in which the directions of the principal stresses the cycle but each principal stress retains its identity
at the point being considered do not change during as it rotates.
the cycle, the steps stipulated in (a) through (c) below (e) Determine the stress differences S′12ps ′1−s ′2,
shall be taken to determine the alternating stress in- S′23ps ′2−s ′3, and S′31ps ′3−s ′1 versus time for the
tensity. complete cycle and find the largest absolute magnitude
(a) Principal Stresses. Consider the values of the of any stress difference at any time. The alternating
three principal stresses at the point versus time for the stress intensity Salt is one-half of this magnitude.
73
NB-3217 Classification of Stresses fully plastic section to the load set producing initial
yielding in the extreme fibers of the section. In the
Tables NB-3217-1 and NB-3217-2 provide assistance
evaluation of the initial yield and fully plastic section
in the determination of the category to which a stress
capacities, the ratios of each individual load in the
should be assigned.
respective load set to each other load in that load set
shall be the same as the respective ratios of the individ-
ual loads in the specified design load set. The value
NB-3220 STRESS LIMITS FOR OTHER
of a shall not exceed the value calculated for bending
THAN BOLTS
only (Pm p 0). In no case shall the value of a exceed
NB-3221 Design Loadings 1.5. The propensity for buckling of the part of the
section that is in compression shall be investigated.
The stress intensity limits which must be satisfied
The a factor is not permitted for Level D Service
for the Design Loadings (NB-3112) stated in the Design
Limits when inelastic component analysis is used as
Specifications are the four limits of this paragraph and
permitted in Appendix F.
the Special Stress Limits of NB-3227. The provisions
of NB-3228 may provide relief from certain of these NB-3221.4 External Pressure. The provisions of
stress limits if plastic analysis techniques are applied. NB-3133 apply.
The design stress intensity values Sm are given by NB-
3229. The limits are summarized by Fig. NB-3221-1.
NB-3221.1 General Primary Membrane Stress In- NB-3222 Level A Service Limits
tensity. (Derived from Pm in Fig. NB-3221-1.) This Level A Service Limits must be satisfied for the
stress intensity is derived from the average value across Service Conditions [NCA-2142.4(b)(1)] for which these
the thickness of a section of the general primary stresses limits are designated in the Design Specifications and
(NB-3213.8) produced by design internal pressure and are the four limits of this paragraph and the Special
other specified Design Mechanical Loads, but excluding Stress Limits of NB-3227. The provisions of NB-3228
all secondary and peak stresses. Averaging is to be may provide relief from certain of these stress limits
applied to the stress components prior to determination if plastic analysis techniques are applied. The design
of the stress intensity values. The allowable value of stress intensity values Sm are given by NB-3229. The
this stress intensity is Sm at the Design Temperature. limits are summarized by Fig. NB-3222-1.
NB-3221.2 Local Membrane Stress Intensity. (De- NB-3222.1 Primary Membrane and Bending Stress
rived from PL in Fig. NB-3221-1.) This stress intensity Intensities. There are no specific limits established on
is derived from the average value across the thickness the primary stresses in the Level A Limits. However,
of a section of the local primary stresses (NB-3213.10) the stresses due to primary loads presented during
produced by Design Pressure and specified Design normal service must be computed and combined with
Mechanical Loads, but excluding all thermal and peak the effects of other loadings in satisfying the remaining
stresses. Averaging is to be applied to the stress compo- limits.
nents prior to the determination of the stress intensity
values. The allowable value of this stress intensity is NB-3222.2 Primary Plus Secondary Stress Inten-
1.5Sm. sity.5 This stress intensity is derived from the highest
value at any point across the thickness of a section of
NB-3221.3 Primary Membrane (General or Local)
the general or local primary membrane stresses, plus
Plus Primary Bending Stress Intensity. (Derived from
primary bending stresses plus secondary stresses, pro-
PL 6 Pb in Fig. NB-3221-1.) This stress intensity is
duced by the specified service pressure and other speci-
derived from the highest value across the thickness of
fied mechanical loads and by general thermal effects
a section of the general or local primary membrane
associated with normal Service Conditions. The allow-
stresses plus primary bending stresses produced by
able value of the maximum range of this stress intensity
Design Pressure and other specified Design Mechanical
is 3Sm.
Loads, but excluding all secondary and peak stresses.
For solid rectangular sections, the allowable value of
this stress intensity is 1.5Sm. For other than solid 5 The concept of stress differences discussed in NB-3216 is essential
rectangular sections, a value of a times the limit to determination to the maximum range, since algebraic signs must
be retained in the computation. Note that this limitation on range
established in NB-3221.1 may be used, where the factor is applicable to the entire history of normal Service Conditions, not
a is defined as the ratio of the load set producing a just to the stresses resulting from each individual transient.
74
NB-3000 — DESIGN Table NB-3217-1
TABLE NB-3217-1
CLASSIFICATION OF STRESS INTENSITY IN VESSELS FOR SOME TYPICAL CASES1
Vessel Part Location Origin of Stress Type of Stress Classification

Cylindrical or Shell plate remote Internal pressure General membrane Pm
spherical shell from disconti- Gradient through plate
nuities thickness Q
Axial thermal gradient Membrane Q
Bending Q
Junction with head Internal pressure Membrane PL
or flange Bending Q [Note (2)]
Any shell or head Any section across External load or mo- General membrane aver-
entire vessel ment, or internal aged across full section Pm
pressure
External load or Bending across full section
Pm
moment
Near nozzle or External load or mo- Local membrane PL
other opening ment, or internal Bending Q
pressure Peak (fillet or corner) F
Any location Temperature difference Membrane Q
between shell and Bending Q
head
Dished head or Crown Internal pressure Membrane Pm
conical head Bending Pb
Knuckle or junction Internal pressure Membrane PL [Note (3)]
to shell Bending Q
Flat head Center region Internal pressure Membrane Pm
Bending Pb
Junction to shell Internal pressure Membrane PL
Bending Q [Note (2)]
Perforated head Typical ligament in Pressure Membrane (averaged Pm
or shell a uniform through cross section)
pattern Bending (averaged through
width of ligament, but Pb
gradient through plate)
Peak F
Isolated or atypical Pressure Membrane Q
ligament Bending F
Peak F
Nozzle Within the limits of Pressure and external General membrane Pm
(NB-3227.5) reinforcement loads and moments, Bending (other than gross
defined by including those attrib- structural discontinuity Pm
NB-3334 utable to restrained stresses) averaged
free end displace- through nozzle thickness
ments of attached
piping
(continued)
75
Table NB-3217-1 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB
TABLE NB-3217-1 (CONT’D)

CLASSIFICATION OF STRESS INTENSITY IN VESSELS FOR SOME TYPICAL CASES1
Vessel Part Location Origin of Stress Type of Stress Classification

Nozzle Outside the limits Pressure and external General membrane stresses Pm
(NB-3227.5) of reinforcement axial, shear, and tor-
defined by sional loads other
NB-3334 than those attribut-
able to restrained
free end displace-
ments of attached
piping
Pressure and external Membrane PL

loads and moments Bending Pb
other than those at-
tributable to re-
strained free end dis-
placements of
attached piping
Pressure and all exter- Membrane PL
nal loads and mo- Bending Q
ments Peak F
Nozzle wall Gross structural Local membrane PL
discontinuities Bending Q
Peak F
Differential Membrane Q
expansion Bending Q
Peak F
Cladding Any Differential expansion Membrane F
Bending F
Any Any Radial temperature dis- Equivalent linear stress Q
tribution [Note (4)] [Note (5)]
Nonlinear portion of stress F

distribution
Any Any Any Stress concentration (notch F
effect)
NOTES:
(1) Q & F classification of stresses refers to other than design condition (Fig. NB-3222-1).
(2) If the bending moment at the edge is required to maintain the bending stress in the middle to acceptable limits, the edge bending is classified
as Pb. Otherwise, it is classified as Q.
(3) Consideration shall also be given to the possibility of wrinkling and excessive deformation in vessels with a large diameter–thickness ratio.
(4) Consider possibility of thermal stress ratchet.
(5) Equivalent linear stress if defined as the linear stress distribution which has the same net bending moment as the actual stress distribution.
76
NB-3000 — DESIGN Table NB-3217-2
TABLE NB-3217-2
CLASSIFICATION OF STRESS INTENSITY IN PIPING, TYPICAL CASES
Discontinuities
Considered
Piping Component Locations Origin of Stress Classification Gross Local
Pipe or tube, elbows, and Any, except crotch Internal pressure Pm No No
reducers. Intersections regions of PL and Q Yes No
and branch connections, intersections F Yes Yes
except in crotch regions
Sustained mechanical loads, includ- Pb No No
ing weight PL and Q Yes No
Nonreversing dynamic loads F Yes Yes
Expansion Pe Yes No
F Yes Yes
Axial thermal gradient Q Yes No
F Yes Yes
Reversing dynamic loads [Note (1)]
Intersections, including In crotch region Internal pressure, sustained PL and Q [Note (2)] Yes No
tees and branch mechanical loads, expansion, and F Yes Yes
connections nonreversing dynamic loads
Axial thermal gradient Q Yes No

F Yes Yes
Reversing dynamic loads [Note (1)]
Bolts and flanges Any Internal pressure, gasket compres- Pm No No
sion, and bolt load Q Yes No
F Yes Yes
Thermal gradient Q Yes No

F Yes Yes
Expansion Pe Yes No
F Yes Yes
Any Any Nonlinear radial thermal gradient F Yes Yes
Linear radial thermal gradient F Yes No

Anchor point motions, including Q Yes No
those resulting from earthquake
NOTES:
(1) The stress intensity resulting from this loading has special requirements that must be satisfied. For Level B Service Limits, these are provided
in NB-3223(b)(2) and for Level D Service Limits in NB-3228.6.
(2) Analysis is not required when reinforced in accordance with NB-3643.
77
FIG. NB-3221-1 STRESS CATEGORIES AND LIMITS OF STRESS INTENSITY

FOR DESIGN CONDITIONS
78
79
NB-3000 — DESIGN
98 FIG. NB-3222-1 STRESS CATEGORIES AND LIMITS OF STRESS INTENSITY FOR LEVEL A AND LEVEL B SERVICE LIMITS
Fig. NB-3222-1
Fig. NB-3222-1
80
1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB
98 FIG. NB-3222-1 STRESS CATEGORIES AND LIMITS OF STRESS INTENSITY FOR LEVEL A AND LEVEL B SERVICE LIMITS (CONT’D)
NB-3222.3 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3222.4
NB-3222.3 Expansion Stress Intensity. (Not applica- directly comparable.6 Where necessary, the curves have
ble to vessels; Pe in Fig. NB-3222-1.) This stress been adjusted to include the maximum effects of mean
intensity is the highest value of stress, neglecting local stress, which is the condition where the stress fluctuates
structural discontinuities, produced at any point across about a mean value that is different from zero. As a
the thickness of a section by the loadings that result consequence of this procedure, it is essential that the
from restraint of free end displacement. The allowable requirements of NB-3222.2 be satisfied at all times
value of the maximum range of this stress intensity with transient stresses included, and that the calculated
is 3Sm. value of the alternating stress intensity be proportional
to the actual strain amplitude. To evaluate the effect
NB-3222.4 Analysis for Cyclic Operation of alternating stresses of varying amplitudes, a linear
(a) Suitability for Cyclic Condition. The suitability damage relation is assumed in (e)(4) below.
of a component for specified service loadings involving (d) Components Not Requiring Analysis for Cyclic
cyclic application of loads and thermal conditions shall Service. An analysis for cyclic service is not required,
be determined by the methods described herein, except and it may be assumed that the limits on peak stress
that the suitability of high strength bolts shall be intensities as governed by fatigue have been satisfied
determined by the methods of NB-3232.3(b) and the for a component by compliance with the applicable
possibility of thermal stress ratchet shall be investigated requirements for material, design, fabrication, examina-
in accordance with NB-3222.5. If the specified Service tion, and testing of this Subsection, provided the speci-
Loadings of the component meet all of the conditions fied Service Loading7 of the component or portion
of (d) below, no analysis for cyclic service is required, thereof meets all the conditions stipulated in (1) through
and it may be assumed that the limits on peak stress (6) below.
intensities as governed by fatigue have been satisfied (1) Atmospheric to Service Pressure Cycle. The
by compliance with the applicable requirements for specified number of times (including startup and shut-
material, design, fabrication, examination, and testing down) that the pressure will be cycled from atmospheric
of this Subsection. If the Service Loadings do not meet pressure to service pressure and back to atmospheric
all the conditions of (d) below, a fatigue analysis shall pressure during normal service does not exceed the
be made in accordance with (e) below or a fatigue number of cycles on the applicable fatigue curve of
test shall be made in accordance with II-1500. Figs. I-9.0 corresponding to an Sa value of three times
(b) Peak Stress Intensity. This stress intensity is the Sm value for the material at service temperature.
derived from the highest value at any point across the (2) Normal Service Pressure Fluctuation. The
thickness of a section of the combination of all primary, specified full range of pressure fluctuations during
secondary, and peak stresses produced by specified normal service does not exceed the quantity 1⁄3 × Design
service pressures and other mechanical loads, and by Pressure × (Sa /Sm), where Sa is the value obtained
general and local thermal effects associated with normal from the applicable design fatigue curve for the total
service conditions, and including the effects of gross specified number of significant pressure fluctuations and
and local structural discontinuities. Sm is the allowable stress intensity for the material at
(c) Conditions and Procedures. The conditions and service temperature. If the total specified number of
procedures of NB-3222.4 are based on a comparison significant pressure fluctuations exceeds the maximum
of peak stresses with strain cycling fatigue data. The number of cycles defined on the applicable design
strain cycling fatigue data are represented by design fatigue curve, the Sa value corresponding to the maxi-
fatigue strength curves of Figs. I-9.0. These curves mum number of cycles defined on the curve may be
show the allowable amplitude Sa of the alternating used. Significant pressure fluctuations are those for
stress intensity component (one-half of the alternating which the total excursion exceeds the quantity:
stress intensity range) plotted against the number of
cycles. This stress intensity amplitude is calculated on
the assumption of elastic behavior and, hence, has the Design Pressure × 1⁄3 × (S /Sm )
dimensions of stress, but it does not represent a real
stress when the elastic range is exceeded. The fatigue 6 As an exception to the use of strain controlled test data, Fig. I-
curves are obtained from uniaxial strain cycling data 9.2.2, Curves B and C are based on load controlled fatigue data.
in which the imposed strains have been multiplied by 7 As is stated in NB-3223, for components operating within the
the elastic modulus and a design margin has been temperature limits of this Subsection, Service Loadings for which
Level B Limits are designated must be considered as though Level
provided so as to make the calculated stress intensity A Limits were designated in evaluating exemptions from fatigue
amplitude and the allowable stress intensity amplitude analysis.
81
where S is defined as follows. expansion, the total algebraic range of temperature

(a) If the total specified number of service cycles fluctuation, °F, experienced by the component during
is 106 cycles or less, S is the value of Sa obtained normal service does not exceed the magnitude
from the applicable design fatigue curve for 106 cycles. Sa /2(E1a1 − E2a2), where Sa is the value obtained from
(b) If the total specified number of service cycles the applicable design fatigue curve for the total specified
exceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of Sa obtained from number of significant temperature fluctuations, E1 and
the applicable design fatigue curve for the maximum E2 are the moduli of elasticity, and a1 and a2 are
number of cycles defined on the curve. the values of the instantaneous coefficients of thermal
(3) Temperature Difference — Startup and Shut- expansion at the mean temperature value involved for
down. The temperature difference, °F, between any two the two materials of construction given in Section II,
adjacent points8 of the component during normal service Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TE and TM. A temperature
does not exceed Sa /2Ea, where Sa is the value obtained fluctuation shall be considered to be significant if its
from the applicable design fatigue curves for the speci- total excursion exceeds the quantity S /2(E1a1−E2a2),
fied number of startup–shutdown cycles, a is the value where S is defined as follows.
of the instantaneous coefficient of thermal expansion (a) If the total specified number of service cycles
and E at the mean value of the temperatures at the is 106 cycles or less, S is the value of Sa obtained
two points as given by Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, from the applicable design fatigue curve for 106 cycles.
Tables TE and TM. (b) If the total specified number of service cycles
(4) Temperature Difference — Normal Service.9 exceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of Sa obtained from
The temperature difference, °F, between any two adja- the applicable design fatigue curve for the maximum
cent points8 does not change10 during normal service number of cycles defined on the curve. If the two
by more than the quantity Sa /2Ea, where Sa is the materials used have different applicable design fatigue
value obtained from the applicable design fatigue curve curves, the lower value of Sa shall be used in applying
of Figs. I-9.0 for the total specified number of significant the rules of this paragraph.
temperature difference fluctuations. A temperature dif- (6) Mechanical Loads. The specified full range of
ference fluctuation shall be considered to be significant mechanical loads, excluding pressure but including pipe
if its total algebraic range exceeds the quantity S /2Ea, reactions, does not result in load stresses whose range
where S is defined as follows. exceeds the Sa value obtained from the applicable
(a) If the total specified number of service cycles design fatigue curve of Figs. I-9.0 for the total specified
is 106 cycles or less, S is the value of Sa obtained number of significant load fluctuations. If the total
from the applicable design fatigue curve for 106 cycles. specified number of significant load fluctuations exceeds
(b) If the total specified number of service cycles the maximum number of cycles defined on the applicable
exceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of Sa obtained from design fatigue curve, the Sa value corresponding to the
the applicable design fatigue curve for the maximum maximum number of cycles defined on the curve may
number of cycles defined on the curve. be used. A load fluctuation shall be considered to be
(5) Temperature Difference — Dissimilar Materi- significant if the total excursion of load stress exceeds
als. For components fabricated from materials of dif- the quantity S, where S is defined as follows.
fering moduli of elasticity or coefficients of thermal (a) If the total specified number of service cycles
is 106 cycles or less, S is the value of Sa obtained
8 Adjacent points are defined in (a), (b), and (c) below. from the applicable design fatigue curve for 106 cycles.
(a) For surface temperature differences on surfaces of revolution (b) If the total specified number of service cycles
in the meridional direction, adjacent points are defined as points that exceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of Sa obtained from
are less than the distance 2√ Rt, where R is the radius measured the applicable design fatigue curve for the maximum
normal to the surface from the axis of rotation to the midwall and
t is the thickness of the part at the point under consideration. If the number of cycles defined on the curve.
product Rt varies, the average value of the points shall be used. (e) Procedure for Analysis for Cyclic Loading. If
(b) For surface temperature differences on surfaces of revolution the specified Service Loadings for the component do
in the circumferential direction and on flat parts, such as flanges
and flat heads, adjacent points are defined as any two points on the not meet the conditions of NB-3222.4(d), the ability
same surface. of the component to withstand the specified cyclic
(c) For through-thickness temperature differences, adjacent points service without fatigue failure shall be determined as
are defined as any two points on a line normal to any surface.
9 Normal
provided in this subsubparagraph. The determination
service is defined as service, other than startup and shutdown,
resulting in specified Service Loadings for which Level A Limits, shall be made on the basis of the stresses at a point,
Level B Limits, or Testing Limits are designated. and the allowable stress cycles shall be adequate for
10 The algebraic range of the difference shall be used. the specified Service Loadings at every point. Only
82
NB-3222.4 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3222.5
the stress differences due to service cycles as specified only one which produces significant fluctuating stresses,
in the Design Specifications need be considered. Com- this is the allowable number of cycles.
pliance with these requirements means only that the (5) Cumulative Damage. If there are two or more
component is suitable from the standpoint of possible types of stress cycle which produce significant stresses,
fatigue failure; complete suitability for the specified their cumulative effect shall be evaluated as stipulated
Service Loadings is also dependent on meeting the in Steps 1 through 6 below.
general stress limits of NB-3222 and any applicable Step 1: Designate the specified number of times each
special stress limits of NB-3227. type of stress cycle of types 1, 2, 3, . . .,
(1) Stress Differences. For each condition of nor- n, will be repeated during the life of the
mal service, determine the stress differences and component as n1, n2, n3, . . ., nn, respectively.
the alternating stress intensity Sa in accordance with
NOTE: In determining n1, n2, n3, . . ., nn, consideration shall be
NB-3216. given to the superposition of cycles of various origins which produce
(2) Local Structural Discontinuities. These effects a total stress difference range greater than the stress difference ranges
of the individual cycles. For example, if one type of stress cycle
shall be evaluated for all conditions using stress concen- produces 1000 cycles of a stress difference variation from zero to
tration factors determined from theoretical, experimen- +60,000 psi and another type of stress cycle produces 10,000 cycles
tal, or photoelastic studies, or numerical stress analysis of a stress difference variation from zero to −50,000 psi, the two types
of cycle to be considered are defined by the following parameters:
techniques. Experimentally determined fatigue strength (a) for type 1 cycle, n1 p 1000 and Salt1 p (60,000 + 50,000) /2 p
reduction factors may be used when determined in 55,000 psi;
accordance with the procedures of II-1600, except for (b) for type 2 cycle, n2 p 9000 and Salt 2 p (50,000 + 0) /2 p
25,000 psi.
high strength alloy steel bolting for which the require-
ments of NB-3232.3(c) shall apply when using the Step 2: For each type of stress cycle, determine
design fatigue curve of Fig. I-9.4. Except for the case the alternating stress intensity Salt by the
of crack-like defects and specified piping geometries procedures of NB-3216.1 or NB-3216.2
for which specific values are given in NB-3680, no above. Call these quantities Salt 1, Salt 2,
fatigue strength reduction factor greater than five need Salt 3, . . ., Salt n.
be used. Step 3: For each value Salt 1, Salt 2, Salt 3, . . ., Salt n,
(3) Design Fatigue Curves. Figures I-9.0 contain use the applicable design fatigue curve to
the applicable fatigue design curves for the materials determine the maximum number of repeti-
permitted by this Subsection. When more than one tions which would be allowable if this type
curve is presented for a given material, the applicability of cycle were the only one acting. Call these
of each is identified. Where curves for various strength values N1, N2, N3, . . ., Nn.
levels of a material are given, linear interpolation Step 4: For each type of stress cycle, calculate the
may be used for intermediate strength levels of these usage factors U1, U2, U3, . . ., Un, from
materials. The strength level is the specified minimum U1pn1 /N1, U2pn2 /N2,U3pn3 /N3, . . . ,
room temperature value. The design fatigue curves of Unpnn /Nn.
Figs. I-9.0 are defined over a cyclic range of 10 to Step 5: Calculate the cumulative usage factor U from
106 cycles, except that for austenitic steels, nickel– UpU1+U2+U3+. . .+ Un.
chromium–iron alloys, and nickel–iron–chromium Step 6: The cumulative usage factor U shall not
alloys, nickel–chromium–molybdenum–iron alloys, and exceed 1.0.
nickel–copper alloys, the design fatigue curve is ex- NB-3222.5 Thermal Stress Ratchet. It should be
tended to 1011 cycles in Figs. I-9.2.2 and I-9.5. Criteria noted that under certain combinations of steady state
for the use of the latter curve are given in Fig. I-9.2.2 and cyclic loadings there is a possibility of large
and are also presented graphically by the flow chart distortions developing as the result of ratchet action;
given in Fig. I-9.2.3. that is, the deformation increases by a nearly equal
(4) Effect of Elastic Modulus. Multiply Salt (as amount for each cycle. Examples of this phenomenon
determined in NB-3216.1 or NB-3216.2) by the ratio are treated in this subparagraph and in NB-3227.3.
of the modulus of elasticity given on the design fatigue (a) The limiting value of the maximum cyclic thermal
curve to the value of the modulus of elasticity used stress permitted in a portion of an axisymmetric shell
in the analysis. Enter the applicable design fatigue loaded by steady state internal pressure in order to
curve of Figs. I-9.0 at this value on the ordinate axis prevent cyclic growth in diameter is as follows. Let
and find the corresponding number of cycles on the xpmaximum general membrane stress due to
abscissa. If the service cycle being considered is the pressure divided by the yield strength Sy
83
y′pmaximum allowable range of thermal stress dynamic loads (NB-3213.36), the requirements of (a)(1),
computed on an elastic basis divided by (a)(2), and (a)(3) above shall be satisfied.
the yield strength11Sy (2) For Level B Service Limits which include
reversing dynamic loads that are not required to be
Case 1: Linear variation of temperature through the
combined with nonreversing dynamic loads, the require-
wall: for 0 < x <0.5, y′ p 1 / x and, for
ments of NB-3222.2 and NB-3222.4(e) shall be satisfied
0.5 < x <1.0, y′ p 4 (1− x).
in lieu of (b)(1) above. In addition, any deflection
Case 2: Parabolic constantly increasing or constantly
limits prescribed by the Design Specification must be
decreasing variation of temperature through
satisfied.
the wall: for 0.615 < x <1.0, y′ p 5.2(1 −
x) and, approximately for x <0.615, y′ p
4.65, 3.55, and 2.70 for x p 0.3, 0.4, and NB-3224 Level C Service Limits
0.5, respectively.
(b) Use of yield strength Sy in the above relations If the Design Specifications specify any Service
instead of the proportional limit allows a small amount Loadings for which Level C Service Limits are desig-
of growth during each cycle until strain hardening nated [NCA-2142.4(b)(3) and NB-3113(b)] for compo-
raises the proportional limit to Sy. If the yield strength nents other than piping, the rules used in evaluating
of the material is higher than the endurance limit12 for these loadings shall be those used for other loadings,
the material, the latter value shall be used if there is except as modified by the following subparagraphs and
to be a large number of cycles because strain softening as summarized in Fig. NB-3224-1. For piping, special
may occur. requirements are provided in NB-3224.7.
NB-3222.6 Deformation Limits. Any deformation NB-3224.1 Primary Stress Limits. The primary
limits prescribed by the Design Specifications shall be stress limits of NB-3221 shall be satisfied using an Sm
satisfied. value equal to the greater of 120% of the tabulated
Sm value or 100% of the tabulated yield strength, with
both values taken at the appropriate temperature. In
98 NB-3223 Level B Service Limits addition, for ferritic material, the Pm elastic analysis
(a) For components other than piping operating limits for pressure loadings alone shall be equal to the
within the temperature limits of this Subsection, the greater of 1.1Sm or 0.9Sy.
requirements of (1), (2), and (3) below shall apply. NB-3224.2 External Pressure. The permissible exter-
(1) The values of Level A Service Limits shall nal pressure shall be taken as 120% of that given by
apply for Level B Service Limits, except that for the rules of NB-3133.
primary stress intensities generated by Level B Service
Loadings, allowable stress intensity values of 110% of NB-3224.3 Special Stress Limits. The permissible
those given in Fig. NB-3221-1 shall apply. values for special stress limit shall be taken as 120%
(2) In evaluating possible exemption from fatigue of the values given in NB-3227.4 and NB-3228.
analysis by the methods of NB-3222.4(d), Service Load- NB-3224.4 Secondary and Peak Stresses. The re-
ings for which Level B Limits are designated shall be quirements of NB-3222.2, NB-3222.4, NB-3222.5, and
considered as though Level A Limits were designated. NB-3227.3 need not be satisfied.
(3) Any deformation limits prescribed by the De-
sign Specifications shall be satisfied. NB-3224.5 Fatigue Requirements. Service Loadings
(b) For piping components operating within the tem- for which Level C Service Limits are designated need
perature limits of this Subsection, the requirements of not be considered when applying the procedures of
(1) or (2) below shall apply. NB-3222.4(a) to determine whether or not a fatigue
(1) For Level B Service Limits which do not analysis is required.
include reversing dynamic loads (NB-3213.35) or have
NB-3224.6 Deformation Limits. Any deformation
reversing dynamic loads combined with nonreversing
limits prescribed by the Design Specifications shall be
11 It
considered.
is permissible to use 1.5Sm whenever it is greater than Sy.
12 The endurance limit shall be taken as two times the Sa value at NB-3224.7 Piping Requirements
107 cycles in the applicable fatigue curve of Figs. I-9.0, except that (a) For Level C Service Limits which do not include
for the curves of Figs. I-9.2.1 and I-9.2.2 the endurance limit shall
be taken as two times the Sa value at 1011 cycles obtained from reversing dynamic loads or have reversing dynamic
Curve A. load combined with nonreversing dynamic loads, the
84
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3224.1
FIG. NB-3224-1 STRESS CATEGORIES AND LIMITS OF STRESS INTENSITY FOR LEVEL C SERVICE LIMITS
85
ASME B&PVC sec3nb$u15 05-07-99 03:42:25 pd: sec3nb Rev 14.04

requirements of NB-3224.1 through NB-3224.6 above (1) For Pm ≤ 0.67Sy

shall be satisfied.
(b) As an alternative to (a) above, for Level C Pm + Pb ≤ 1.35Sy
Service Limits which include reversing dynamic loads
that are not required to be combined with nonreversing (2) For 0.67Sy < Pm ≤ 0.90Sy
dynamic loads, the requirements of NB-3228.6 may be
satisfied using 70% of the specified allowable strain Pm + Pb ≤ (2.15Sy − 1.2Pm )
values. where Sy is the tabulated yield strength at test tempera-
ture. For other than regular sections, Pm + Pb shall
not exceed a value of ␣ times 0.9Sy for hydrostatic
tests or ␣ times 0.8Sy for pneumatic tests, where the
NB-3225 Level D Service Limits factor ␣ is defined as the ratio of the load set producing
a fully plastic section divided by the load set producing
(a) For components other than piping, if the Design initial yielding in the extreme fibers of the section.
Specifications specify any Service Loadings for which (d) The external pressure shall not exceed 135%
Level D Limits are designated [NCA-2142.4(b)(4)], the of the value determined by the rules of NB-3133.
rules contained in Appendix F may be used in evaluating Alternatively, an external hydrostatic test pressure may
these loadings, independently of all other Design and be applied up to a maximum of 80% of the lower of
Service Loadings. the collapse or elastic instability pressures determined
(b) For piping fabricated from material designated by analysis or experimental procedures (NB-3228 and
P-No. 1 through P-No. 9 in Table 2A, Section II, Part Appendix II) including consideration of allowable toler-
D, if the Design Specifications specify any Service ances. If a collapse analysis is performed, it shall be
Loading for which Level D Limits are designated a lower bound limit analysis assuming ideally elastic–
[NCA-2142.4(b)(4)], the rules contained in NB-3228.6 plastic (nonstrain-hardening) material having a yield
may be used as an alternative to those contained in strength equal to its tabulated yield strength at test
Appendix F. For other piping materials, the rules of temperature.
Appendix F may be used in evaluating these loadings, (e) Tests, with the exception of either the first 10
independently of all other Design and Service Loadings. hydrostatic tests in accordance with NB-6220, the first
10 pneumatic tests in accordance with NB-6320, or
any combination of 10 such tests, shall be considered
in the fatigue evaluation of the component. In this
A99 NB-3226 Testing Limits fatigue evaluation, the limits on the primary plus second-
ary stress intensity range (NB-3222.2) may be taken
The evaluation of pressure test loadings (NCA- as the larger of 3Sm or 2Sy when at least one extreme
2142.3) shall be in accordance with (a) through (e) of the stress intensity range is determined by the Test
below, except that these rules do not apply to the items Loadings.
in NB-3500.
(a) If the calculated pressure at any point in a vessel, NB-3227 Special Stress Limits
including static head, exceeds the required test pressure
The following deviations from the basic stress limits
defined in NB-6221 or NB-6321 by more than 6%,
are provided to cover special Service Loadings or
the resulting stresses shall be calculated using all the
configurations. Some of these deviations are more re-
loadings that may exist during the test. The stress
strictive, and some are less restrictive, than the basic
allowables for this situation are given in (b) and (c)
stress limits. In cases of conflict between these require-
below.
ments and the basic stress limits, the rules of NB-3227
(b) For hydrostatically tested vessels, the general
take precedence for the particular situations to which
primary membrane stress intensity Pm shall not exceed
they apply.
90% of the tabulated yield strength Sy at test temperature.
For pneumatically tested vessels, Pm shall not exceed NB-3227.1 Bearing Loads
80% of the tabulated yield strength Sy at test temperature. (a) The average bearing stress for resistance to crush-
(c) For either hydrostatically or pneumatically tested ing under the maximum load, experienced as a result
vessels, the primary membrane plus bending stress of Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service
intensity Pm + Pb shall not exceed the applicable limits Loadings, except those for which Level D Limits are
given in (1) or (2) below. designated, shall be limited to Sy at temperature, except
86

NB-3227.1 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3227.1
that when the distance to a free edge is larger than

the distance over which the bearing load is applied, a
stress of 1.5Sy at temperature is permitted. For clad
surfaces, the yield strength of the base metal may be
used if, when calculating the bearing stress, the bearing
area is taken as the lesser of the actual contact area
86.1

NB-3227.1 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3227.5
or the area of the base metal supporting the contact yielding, such joints are subject to ratcheting because
surface. the mating members may become loose at the end of
(b) When bearing loads are applied near free edges, each complete operating cycle and start the next cycle
such as at a protruding ledge, the possibility of a shear in a new relationship with each other, with or without
failure shall be considered. In the case of load stress manual manipulation. Additional distortion may occur
only (NB-3213.12) the average shear stress shall be in each cycle so that interlocking parts, such as threads,
limited to 0.6Sm. In the case of load stress plus secondary can eventually lose engagement. Therefore, primary
stress (NB-3213.10) the average shear stress shall not plus secondary stress intensities (NB-3222.2), which
exceed (1) or (2) below: result in slippage between the parts of a nonintegral
(1) for materials to which Note (2) of Section II, connection in which disengagement could occur as a
Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B applies, the lower result of progressive distortion, shall be limited to the
of 0.5Sy at 100°F (38°C) and 0.675Sy at temperature; value Sy (Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table Y-1).
(2) for all other materials, 0.5Sy at temperature.
NB-3227.4 Triaxial Stresses. The algebraic sum of
For clad surfaces, if the configuration or thickness is the three primary principal stresses (s1 + s2 + s3)
such that a shear failure could occur entirely within shall not exceed four times the tabulated value of Sm,
the clad material, the allowable shear stress for the except for Service Level D.
cladding shall be determined from the properties of
the equivalent wrought material. If the configuration NB-3227.5 Nozzle Piping Transition. Within the
is such that a shear failure could occur across a path limits of reinforcement given by NB-3334, whether or
that is partially base metal and partially clad material, not nozzle reinforcement is provided, the Pm classifica-
the allowable shear stresses for each material shall be tion is applicable to stress intensities resulting from
used when evaluating the combined resistance to this pressure-induced general membrane stresses as well as
type of failure. stresses other than discontinuity stresses due to external
(c) When considering bearing stresses in pins and loads and moments including those attributable to re-
similar members, the Sy at temperature value is applica- strained free end displacements of the attached pipe.
ble, except that a value of 1.5Sy may be used if no Also, within the limits of reinforcement, a PL classifica-
credit is given to bearing area within one pin diameter tion shall be applied to local primary membrane stress
from a plate edge. intensities derived from discontinuity effects plus pri-
mary bending stress intensities due to combined pressure
NB-3227.2 Pure Shear and external loads and moments, including those attrib-
(a) The average primary shear stress across a section utable to restrained free end displacements of the
loaded in pure shear, experienced as a result of Design attached pipe; and a PL + Pb + Q classification shall
Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, apply to primary plus secondary stress intensities re-
except those for which Level D Limits are designated sulting from a combination of pressure, temperature,
(for example, keys, shear rings, screw threads), shall and external loads and moments, including those due
be limited to 0.6Sm. to restrained free end displacements of the attached pipe.
(b) The maximum primary shear that is experienced Beyond the limits of reinforcement, a Pm classification is
as a result of Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any applicable to stress intensities resulting from pressure-
Service Loadings (except those for which Level D induced general membrane stresses as well as the
Limits are designated), exclusive of stress concentration, average stress across the nozzle thickness due to exter-
at the periphery of a solid circular section in torsion nally applied nozzle axial, shear, and torsional loads
shall be limited to 0.8Sm. Primary plus secondary and other than those attributable to restrained free end
peak shear stresses shall be converted to stress intensities displacement of the attached pipe. Also, outside the
(equal to two times the pure shear stress) and as such limits of reinforcement a PL + Pb classification is
shall not exceed the basic stress limits of NB-3222.2 applicable to the stress intensities that result from adding
and NB-3222.4. those stresses classified as Pm to those due to externally
applied bending moments, except those attributable to
98 NB-3227.3 Progressive Distortion of Nonintegral restrained free end displacement of the pipe. Further,
Connections. Screwed on caps, screwed in plugs, shear beyond the limits of reinforcement, a PL + Pb + Q
ring closures, and breech lock closures are examples classification is applicable to stress intensities resulting
of nonintegral connections which are subject to failure from all pressure, temperature, and external loads and
by bell mouthing or other types of progressive deforma- moments, including those attributable to restrained free
tion. If any combination of applied loads produces end displacements of the attached pipe. Beyond the
87
limits of reinforcement, the 3Sm limit on the range of primary membrane stress intensity varies around the
primary plus secondary stress intensity may be exceeded toroidal cross section.
as provided in NB-3228.5, except that in the evaluation (b) All other membrane and bending stress intensities
of NB-3228.5(a) stresses from restrained free end dis- developed in the welded seals may be considered as
placements of the attached pipe may also be excluded. secondary stress intensities. The range of these stress
The range of membrane plus bending stress intensity intensities combined with the general primary membrane
attributable solely to the restrained free end displace- stress intensity may exceed the primary plus secondary
ments of the attached pipe shall be ≤ 3Sm. The nozzle, stress intensity limit of 3Sm, if they are analyzed in
outside the reinforcement limit, shall not be thinner accordance with NB-3228.5 as modified in (1) and (2)
than the larger of the pipe thickness or the quantity below.
tp(Smp /Smn), where tp is the nominal thickness of the (1) In lieu of NB-3228.5(a), the range of the
mating pipe, Smp is the allowable stress intensity value combined primary plus secondary membrane stress in-
for the pipe material, and Smn is the allowable stress tensities shall be ≤3Sm.
intensity value for the nozzle material. (2) NB-3228.5(d) need not apply.
NB-3227.6 Applications of Elastic Analysis for
Stresses Beyond the Yield Strength. Certain of the NB-3228 Applications of Plastic Analysis
allowable stresses permitted in the design criteria are The following subparagraphs provide guidance in the
such that the maximum stress calculated on an elastic application of plastic analysis and some relaxation of
basis may exceed the yield strength of the material. the basic stress limits which are allowed if plastic
The limit on primary plus secondary stress intensity analysis is used.
of 3Sm (NB-3222.2) has been placed at a level which
ensures shakedown to elastic action after a few repeti- NB-3228.1 Limit Analysis. The limits on General 98
tions of the stress cycle except in regions containing Membrane Stress Intensity (NB-3221.1), Local Mem-
significant local structural discontinuities or local ther- brane Stress Intensity (NB-3221.2), and Primary Mem-
mal stresses. These last two factors are considered only brane Plus Primary Bending Stress Intensity (NB-
in the performance of a fatigue evaluation. Therefore: 3221.3) need not be satisfied at a specific location if
(a) In evaluating stresses for comparison with the it can be shown by limit analysis that the specified
stress limits on other than fatigue allowables, stresses loadings do not exceed two-thirds of the lower bound
shall be calculated on an elastic basis. collapse load. The yield strength to be used in these
(b) In evaluating stresses for comparison with fatigue calculations is 1.5Sm. The use of 1.5Sm for the yield
allowables, all stresses except those which result from strength of those materials of Section II, Part D, Subpart
local thermal stresses [NB-3213.13(b)] shall be evalu- 1, Tables 2A and 2B to which Note (2) of the Table
ated on an elastic basis. In evaluating local thermal is applicable may result in small permanent strains
stresses, the elastic equations shall be used, except that during the first few cycles of loading. If these strains
the numerical value substituted for Poisson’s ratio shall are not acceptable, the yield strength to be used shall
be determined from the expression: be reduced according to the strain limiting factors of
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table Y-2. When two-
v p 0.5 − 0.2 (Sy / Sa ), but not less than 0.3 thirds of the lower bound collapse load is used, the
effects of plastic strain concentrations in localized areas
of the structure such as the points where hinges form
where must be considered. The effects of these concentrations
Sap value obtained from the applicable design fa- of strain on the fatigue behavior, ratcheting behavior,
tigue curve (Figs. I-9.0) for the specified number or buckling behavior of the structure must be considered
of cycles of the condition being considered in the design. The design shall satisfy the minimum
Syp yield strength of the material at the mean value wall thickness requirements.
of the temperature of the cycle
NB-3228.2 Experimental Analysis. The limits of
NB-3227.7 Requirements for Specially Designed General Primary Membrane Stress Intensity (NB-
Welded Seals 3221.1), Local Membrane Stress Intensity (NB-3221.2),
(a) Welded seals, such as omega and canopy seals and Primary Membrane Plus Primary Bending Stress
(NB-4360), shall be designed to meet the pressure Intensity (NB-3221.3) need not be satisfied at a specific
induced general primary membrane stress intensity lim- location if it can be shown that the specified loadings
its specified in this Subsection. Note that the general do not exceed two-thirds of the test collapse load
88
NB-3228.2 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3228.5
determined by application of II-1430, in which case TABLE NB-3228.5(b)-1

the effects of plastic strain concentrations in localized VALUES OF m, n, AND Tmax FOR VARIOUS
areas of the structure, such as the points where hinges CLASSES OF PERMITTED MATERIALS
form, must be considered. The effects of these concen-
Materials m n Tmax /°F
trations of strain on the fatigue behavior, ratcheting
behavior, or buckling behavior of the structure must Carbon steel 3.0 0.2 700
be considered in the design. The design shall satisfy Low alloy steel 2.0 0.2 700
Martensitic stainless steel 2.0 0.2 700
the minimum wall thickness requirements. Austenitic stainless steel 1.7 0.3 800
NB-3228.3 Plastic Analysis. Plastic analysis is a Nickel–chromium–iron 1.7 0.3 800
Nickel-copper 1.7 0.3 800
method of structural analysis by which the structural
behavior under given loads is computed by considering
the actual material stress–strain relationship and stress
redistribution, and it may include either strain hardening
or change in geometry, or both.
The limits of General Membrane Stress Intensity (c) In evaluating stresses for comparison with fatigue
(NB-3221.1), Local Membrane Stress Intensity (NB- allowables, the numerically maximum principal total
3221.2), and Primary Membrane Plus Primary Bending strain range shall be multiplied by one-half the modulus
Stress Intensity (NB-3221.3) need not be satisfied at of elasticity of the material (Section II, Part D, Subpart
a specific location if it can be shown that the specified 2, Tables TM) at the mean value of the temperature
loadings do not exceed two-thirds of the plastic analysis of the cycle.
collapse load determined by application of II-1430 to NB-3228.5 Simplified Elastic–Plastic Analysis. The
a load–deflection or load–strain relationship obtained 3Sm limit on the range of primary plus secondary stress
by plastic analysis. When this rule is used, the effects intensity (NB-3222.2) may be exceeded provided that
of plastic strain concentrations in localized areas of the requirements of (a) through (f) below are met.
the structure, such as the points where hinges form, (a) The range of primary plus secondary membrane
must be considered. The effects of the concentrations plus bending stress intensity, excluding thermal bending
of strain on the fatigue behavior, ratcheting behavior, stresses, shall be ≤3Sm.
or buckling behavior of the structure must be considered (b) The value of Sa used for entering the design
in the design. The design shall satisfy the minimum fatigue curve is multiplied by the factor Ke, where:
wall thickness requirements.
NB-3228.4 Shakedown Analysis. The limits on Ther- Ke p 1.0, for Sn ≤ 3Sm
mal Stress Ratchet in Shell (NB-3222.5) and Progressive p 1.0 + [(1 − n) / n (m − 1)](Sn / 3Sm − 1),
Distortion of Non-Integral Connections (NB-3227.3) for 3Sm < Sn < 3mSm
need not be satisfied at a specific location, if, at
the location, the procedures of (a) through (c) below p 1 / n, for Sn ≥ 3mSm
are used.
(a) In evaluating stresses for comparison with the Sn p range of primary plus secondary stress intensity, psi
remaining stress limits, the stresses shall be calculated
on an elastic basis. The values of the material parameters m and n for the
(b) In lieu of satisfying the specific requirements of various classes of permitted materials are as given in
NB-3221.2, NB-3222.2, NB-3222.5, and NB-3227.3 at Table NB-3228.5(b)-1.
a specific location, the structural action shall be calcu- (c) The rest of the fatigue evaluation stays the same
lated on a plastic basis, and the design shall be consid- as required in NB-3222.4, except that the procedure
ered to be acceptable if shakedown occurs (as opposed of NB-3227.6 need not be used.
to continuing deformation). However, this shakedown (d) The component meets the thermal ratcheting re-
requirement need not be satisfied for materials having a quirement of NB-3222.5.
minimum specified yield strength to specified minimum (e) The temperature does not exceed those listed
ultimate strength ratio of less than 0.70 provided the in Table NB-3228.5(b)-1 for the various classes of
maximum accumulated local strain at any point, as a materials.
result of cyclic operation to which plastic analysis is (f) The material shall have a specified minimum
applied, does not exceed 5.0%. In all cases, the deforma- yield strength to specified minimum tensile strength
tions which occur shall not exceed specified limits. ratio of less than 0.80.
89
NB-3228.6 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB NB-3229
NB-3228.6 Reversing Dynamic Loading in Piping. time, o, from the corresponding components
For piping fabricated from material designated P-No. at each point in time, i, during the cycle.
1 through P-No. 9 in Table 2A, Section II, Part D, if
the Design Specifications specify any Service Loading dexi p exi − exo
for which Level D limits are designated [NCA-
2142.2(b)(4)], the rules contained in NB-3228.6 may deyi p eyi − eyo
be used as an alternative to those contained in Appendix
F. For other piping materials, the rules of Appendix
F may be used in evaluating these loadings, indepen- etc.
dently of all other Design and Service Loadings. As
an alternative to meeting the requirements of Appendix Step 4: Calculate the equivalent strain ranges for
F, for piping components subjected to reversing type each point in time as:
dynamic loading as defined in NB-3213.35, the require-
ments of (a)(1) and (a)(2) below shall be satisfied.
√2
However, when the specified Level D Load combination
includes nonreversing dynamic loads (NB-3213.36)
deequiv.i p
3 3(de xi − deyi)2
alone or coincident with earthquake and other reversing

dynamic loads for which the Design Specification re- + (deyi − dexi)2 + (dezi − dexi)2
quires satisfaction of Level D Service Limits, the 1⁄
2
4
requirements of Appendix F must be satisfied for 3
+ (dGxyi2 + dGyzi2 + dGzxi2)
Level D. 2
(a) Deflections, deformations, and strains, including
those caused by incremental ratcheting, must be evalu- Step 5: The equivalent strainrange is the maximum
ated on an inelastic basis to assure compliance with value of the above calculated equivalent
these limits. strain ranges, deequiv.i. The effective cyclic
(1) The effective ratchet strain averaged through single-amplitude strain is half the equivalent
the wall thickness of the piping component due to strain range for one typical cycle of loading.
the application of all simultaneously applied loading The equivalent ratchet strain is the value
including pressure, the effects of gravity, thermal expan- of the above calculated equivalent strain
sion ranges, earthquake inertia ranges, anchor motion range over all the cycles of loading.
ranges, (including thermal, earthquake, etc.) and re- E p Young’s Modulus
versing dynamic loading ranges shall not exceed 5%. N p 10 for earthquake event. For other reversing
(2) The effective local peak cyclic single-amplitude dynamic loads N is the number of cycles
strain ean, in the wall of the piping component due to defined in the Design Specification. How-
the application of all simultaneously applied loading ever, N can never be taken as less than 10.
ranges considered in (a)(1) above shall not exceed the Sa10 p The Sa value at 10 cycles from the applica-
following. ble Design Fatigue Curve in Appendix I
Sa10
ean ≤
NB-3229 Design Stress Values 98
(E√ N )
The design stress intensity values Sm are given in
where Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B for
the equivalent strain range is defined as follows. component materials. Values for intermediate tempera-
tures may be found by interpolation. These form the
Step 1: Identify all strain components for each basis for the various stress limits. Values of yield
point, i, in time (exi, eyi, ezi, Gxyi, Gyzi, Gzxi) strength are given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table
for a complete cycle of interest. Y-1. Values of the coefficient of thermal expansion and
Step 2: Select a time point when conditions are at modulus of elasticity are in Section II, Part D, Subpart
an extreme for the cycle, either maximum 2, Tables TE and TM. The basis for establishing stress
or minimum. Refer to this time point as o. values is given in Appendix III. The design fatigue
Step 3: Calculate the history of the change in strain curves used in conjunction with NB-3222.4 are those
components by subtracting the values at the of Figs. I-9.0.
90
NB-3230 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3235
NB-3230 STRESS LIMITS FOR BOLTS the methods of NB-3222.4(e), using the applicable
design fatigue curve of Figs. I-9.0 and an appropriate
NB-3231 Design Conditions
fatigue strength reduction factor [NB-3232.3(c)].
(a) The number and cross-sectional area of bolts (b) High Strength Alloy Steel Bolting. High strength
required to resist the Design Pressure shall be deter- alloy steel bolts and studs may be evaluated for cyclic
mined in accordance with the procedures of Appendix service by the methods of NB-3222.4(e) using the
E, using the larger of the bolt loads, given by the design fatigue curve of Fig. I-9.4 provided:
equations of Appendix E, as a Design Mechanical Load. (1) the maximum value of the service stress (NB-
The allowable bolt design stresses shall be the values 3232.2) at the periphery of the bolt cross section,
given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 4 for resulting from direct tension plus bending and neglecting
bolting material. stress concentration, shall not exceed 2.7Sm if the higher
(b) When sealing is effected by a seal weld instead of the two fatigue design curves given in Fig. I-9.4
of a gasket, the gasket factor m and the minimum is used. The 2Sm limit for direct tension is unchanged.
design seating stress y may be taken as zero. (2) threads shall be of a Vee-type having a mini-
(c) When gaskets are used for preservice testing mum thread root radius no smaller than 0.003 in.
only, the design is satisfactory if the above requirements (0.076 mm);
are satisfied for mpyp0, and the requirements of NB- (3) fillet radii at the end of the shank shall be
3232 are satisfied when the appropriate m and y factors such that the ratio of fillet radius to shank diameter
are used for the test gasket. is not less than 0.060.
(c) Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor (NB-3213.17).
Unless it can be shown by analysis or tests that a
NB-3232 Level A Service Limits lower value is appropriate, the fatigue strength reduction
Actual service stresses in bolts, such as those pro- factor used in the fatigue evaluation of threaded mem-
duced by the combination of preload, pressure, and bers shall not be less than 4.0. However, when applying
differential thermal expansion, may be higher than the the rules of NB-3232.3(b) for high strength alloy steel
values given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 4. bolts, the value used shall not be less than 4.0.
(d) Effect of Elastic Modulus. Multiply Salt (as deter-
NB-3232.1 Average Stress. The maximum value of mined in NB-3216.1 or NB-3216.2) by the ratio of
service stress, averaged across the bolt cross section the modulus of elasticity given on the design fatigue
and neglecting stress concentrations, shall not exceed curve to the value of the modulus of elasticity used
two times the stress values of Section II, Part D, in the analysis. Enter the applicable design fatigue
Subpart 1, Table 4. curve at this value on the ordinate axis and find the
corresponding number of cycles on the abscissa. If the
NB-3232.2 Maximum Stress. The maximum value
service cycle being considered is the only one which
of service stress, except as restricted by NB-3232.3(b),
produces significant fluctuating stresses, this is the
at the periphery of the bolt cross section resulting
allowable number of cycles.
from direct tension plus bending and neglecting stress
(e) Cumulative Damage. The bolts shall be acceptable
concentrations shall not exceed three times the stress
for the specified cyclic application of loads and thermal
values of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 4. Stress
stresses provided the cumulative usage factor U, as
intensity, rather than maximum stress, shall be limited
determined in NB-3222.4(e)(5), does not exceed 1.0.
to this value when the bolts are tightened by methods
other than heaters, stretchers, or other means which
minimize residual torsion. NB-3233 Level B Service Limits
NB-3232.3 Fatigue Analysis of Bolts. Unless the Level A Service Limits (NB-3232) apply.
components on which they are installed meet all the
conditions of NB-3222.4(d) and thus require no fatigue
NB-3234 Level C Service Limits
analysis, the suitability of bolts for cyclic service shall
be determined in accordance with the procedures of The stress limits of NB-3232.1 and NB-3232.2 apply.
(a) through (e) below.
(a) Bolting Having Less Than 100.0 ksi (689 MPa)
NB-3235 Level D Service Limits
Tensile Strength. Bolts made of material which has
specified minimum tensile strength of less than 100.0 If the Design Specifications specify any Service
ksi (689 MPa) shall be evaluated for cyclic service by Loadings for which Level D Limits are designated
91
[NCA-2142.4(b)(4)], the rules contained in Appendix Rop outside radius of shell or head, in.
F may be used in evaluating these loadings indepen- Smp design stress intensity values (Section II, Part
dently of all other Design and Service Loadings. D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B), psi
tp thickness of shell or head, in.
NB-3236 Design Stress Intensity Values NB-3324.1 Cylindrical Shells
The design stress intensity values Sm are given in PR PRo
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 4 for bolting. tp or t p
Sm − 0.5P Sm + 0.5P
Values for intermediate temperature may be found by
interpolation. The basis for establishing stress intensity
values is given in Appendix III. NB-3324.2 Spherical Shells
PR PRo
tp or t p
NB-3300 VESSEL DESIGN 2Sm − P 2Sm
NB-3310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

NB-3311 Acceptability
NB-3330 OPENINGS AND REINFORCEMENT
The requirements for acceptability of a vessel design
are as follows. NB-3331 General Requirements for Openings
(a) The design shall be such that the requirements (a) For vessels or parts thereof which meet the
of NB-3100 and NB-3200 shall be satisfied. requirements of NB-3222.4(d), analysis showing satis-
(b) The rules of this Subarticle shall be met. In faction of the requirements of NB-3221.1, NB-3221.2,
cases of conflict between NB-3200 and NB-3300 the NB-3221.3, and NB-3222.2 in the immediate vicinity
requirements of NB-3300 shall govern. of the openings is not required for pressure loading if
the rules of NB-3330 are met.
(b) For vessels or parts thereof that do not meet the
NB-3320 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS requirements of NB-3222.4(d) so that a fatigue analysis
NB-3321 Design and Service Loadings is required, the rules contained in NB-3330 ensure
satisfaction of the requirements of NB-3221.1, NB-
The provisions of NB-3110 apply. 3221.2, and NB-3221.3 in the vicinity of openings,
and no specific analysis showing satisfaction of those
NB-3322 Special Considerations stress limits is required for pressure loading. The require-
ments of NB-3222.2 may also be considered to be
The provisions of NB-3120 apply. satisfied if, in the vicinity of the nozzle, the stress
intensity resulting from external nozzle loads and ther-
mal effects, including gross but not local structural
NB-3323 General Design Rules
discontinuities, is shown by analysis to be less than
The provisions of NB-3130 apply except when they 1.5Sm. In this case, when evaluating the requirements
conflict with rules of this Subarticle. In case of conflict, of NB-3222.4(e), the peak stress intensity resulting
this Subarticle governs in the design of vessels. from pressure loadings may be obtained by application
of the stress index method of NB-3338 or NB-3339.
(c) The provisions of (a) and (b) above are not
NB-3324 Tentative Pressure Thickness
intended to restrict the design to any specified section
The following formulas are given as an aid to the thicknesses or other design details, provided the basic
designer for determining a tentative thickness for use stress limits are satisfied. If it is shown by analysis
in the design. They are not to be construed as formulas that all the stress requirements have been met, the rules
for acceptable thicknesses. However, except in local of NB-3330 are waived.
regions (NB-3221.2), the wall thickness of a vessel (d) Openings shall be circular, elliptical, or of any
shall never be less than that obtained from the formulas other shape which results from the intersection of a
in NB-3324.1 and NB-3324.2, in which: circular or elliptical cylinder with a vessel of the shapes
Pp Design Pressure, psi permitted by this Subsection. Additional restrictions
Rp inside radius of shell or head, in. given in NB-3338.2(d) are applicable if the Stress Index
92
NB-3331 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3333
Method is used. If fatigue analysis is not required, the

restrictions on hole spacing are applicable unless there
will be essentially no pipe reactions.
(e) Openings are not limited as to size except to
the extent provided in NB-3338.2(d).
(f) All references to dimensions apply to the finished
dimensions excluding material added as corrosion allow-
ance. Rules regarding metal available for reinforcement
are given in NB-3335.
(g) Any type of opening permitted in these rules
may be located in a welded joint.
NB-3332 Reinforcement Requirements for

Openings in Shells and Formed Heads
NB-3332.1 Openings Not Requiring Reinforce-
ment. The rules for openings not requiring reinforce-
ment are given in (a) through (c) below, where R is
the mean radius and t is the nominal thickness of the
vessel shell or head at the location of the opening;
and locally stressed area means any area in the shell
where the primary local membrane stress exceeds 1.1Sm,
but excluding those areas where such primary local
membrane stress is due to an unreinforced opening.
(a) A single opening has a diameter not exceeding
0.2√ Rt, or if there are two or more openings within
any circle of diameter 2.5√ Rt, but the sum of the
diameters of such unreinforced openings shall not ex-
ceed 0.25√ Rt.
(b) No two unreinforced openings shall have their
centers closer to each other, measured on the inside FIG. NB-3332.2-1 CHART FOR DETERMINING
of the vessel wall, than 1.5 times the sum of their VALUE OF F
diameters.
(c) No unreinforced opening shall have its center
closer than 2.5√ Rt to the edge of a locally stressed
area in the shell.
1.00 shall be used for all configurations, except
NB-3332.2 Required Area of Reinforcement. The that Fig. NB-3332.2-1 may be used for inte-
total cross-sectional area of reinforcement A, required grally reinforced openings in cylindrical shells
in any given plane for a vessel under internal pressure, and cones.)
shall not be less than: trp the thickness which meets the requirements of
NB-3221.1 in the absence of the opening, in.
A p dtr F Not less than half the required material shall be on
each side of the center line.
where
dp finished diameter of a circular opening or fin-
NB-3333 Reinforcement Required for Openings
ished dimension (chord length) of an opening
in Flat Heads
on the plane being considered for elliptical and
obround openings in corroded condition, in. Flat heads that have an opening with a diameter that
Fp a correction factor which compensates for the does not exceed one-half the head diameter shall have
variation in pressure stresses on different planes a total cross-sectional area of reinforcement not less
with respect to the axis of a vessel. (A value of than that given by the formula:
93
A p 0.5 dtr tnp nominal nozzle thickness, as indicated, in.

For the case of a nozzle with a tapered inside diameter,
where d is as defined in NB-3332 and tr is the thickness, the limit shall be obtained by using ri and tn values
in., which meets the requirements of NB-3221.1 and at the nominal outside diameters of the vessel wall
NB-3221.3 in the absence of the opening. [Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-2 sketch (e)].
(b) For Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-2 sketches (c) and (f):
NB-3334 Limits of Reinforcement
Limit p 0.5 √ rm tn
The boundaries of the cross-sectional area in any
plane normal to the vessel wall and passing through where
the center of the opening and within which metal shall rip inside radius, in.
be located in order to have value as reinforcement are rmp ri + 0.5tn, in.
designated as the limits of reinforcement for that plane tn p tp+ 0.667X
and are given in the following subparagraphs. tpp nominal thickness of the attached pipe, in.
NB-3334.1 Limit of Reinforcement Along the Ves- Xp slope offset distance, in.
sel Wall. The limits of reinforcement, measured along up angle between vertical and slope, 45 deg. or less
the midsurface of the nominal wall thickness, shall For the case of a nozzle with a tapered inside diameter,
meet the following. the limit shall be obtained by using ri and tn values
(a) One hundred percent of the required reinforce- at the center of gravity of nozzle reinforcement area.
ment shall be within a distance on each side of the These values must be determined by a trial and error
axis of the opening equal to the greater of the following: procedure [Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-2 sketch (f)].
(1) the diameter of the finished opening in the
corroded condition;
NB-3335 Metal Available for Reinforcement
(2) the radius of the finished opening in the cor-
roded condition plus the sum of the thicknesses of the Metal may be counted as contributing to the area
vessel wall and the nozzle wall. of reinforcing called for in NB-3332, provided it lies
(b) Two-thirds of the required reinforcement shall within the limits of reinforcement specified in NB-
be within a distance on each side of the axis of the 3334, and shall be limited to material which meets the
opening equal to the greater of the following: following requirements:
(1) r + 0.5√ Rt, where R is the mean radius of (a) metal forming a part of the vessel wall which
shell or head, t is the nominal vessel wall thickness, is in excess of that required on the basis of membrane
and r is the radius of the finished opening in the stress intensity (NB-3221.1) and is exclusive of corro-
corroded condition; sion allowance;
(2) the radius of the finished opening in the cor- (b) similar excess metal in the nozzle wall, provided
roded condition plus two-thirds the sum of the thick- the nozzle is integral with the vessel wall or is joined
nesses of the vessel wall and the nozzle wall. to it by a full penetration weld;
(c) weld metal which is fully continuous with the
NB-3334.2 Limit of Reinforcement Normal to the vessel wall;
Vessel Wall. The limits of reinforcement, measured (d) the mean coefficient of thermal expansion of
normal to the vessel wall, shall conform to the contour metal to be included as reinforcement under (b) and
of the surface at a distance from each surface equal (c) above shall be within 15% of the value of the
to the following limits as shown in Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-2. vessel wall material;
(a) For Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-2 sketches (a), (b), (d), (e) metal not fully continuous with the shell, such
and (e): as that in nozzles attached by partial penetration welds,
shall not be counted as reinforcement;
Limit p 0.5 √ rm tn + 0.5r2 (f) metal available for reinforcement shall not be
considered as applying to more than one opening.
where
rip inside radius, in.
NB-3336 Strength of Reinforcing Material
rmp mean radius, in.
p ri + 0.5tn Material used for reinforcement shall preferably be
r2p transition radius, in., between nozzle and wall the same as that of the vessel wall. If the material of
94
NB-3336 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3338.2
the nozzle wall or reinforcement has a lower design where d is the outside diameter of the nozzle, except
stress intensity value Sm than that for the vessel material, that the above limits on maximum clearance need not
the amount of area provided by the nozzle wall or be met for the full length of the opening, provided
reinforcement in satisfying the requirements of NB-3332 there is a region at the weld preparation and a region
shall be taken as the actual area provided multiplied by near the end of the opening opposite the weld that
the ratio of the nozzle or reinforcement design stress does meet the above limits on maximum clearance and
intensity value to the vessel material design stress the latter region is extensive enough (not necessarily
intensity value. No reduction in the reinforcing required continuous) to provide a positive stop for nozzle de-
may be taken for the increased strength of reinforcing flection.
material and weld metal having higher design stress (b) In satisfying the limit of NB-3222.2, the stress
intensity values than that of the material of the vessel intensities resulting from pressure induced strains (dila-
wall. The strength of the material at the point under tion of hole) may be treated as secondary in the
consideration shall be used in fatigue analyses. penetrating part of partial penetration welded construc-
tion, provided the requirements of NB-3352.4(d) and
Fig. NB-4244(d)-1 are fulfilled.
NB-3337 Attachment of Nozzles and Other

Connections NB-3338 Fatigue Evaluation of Stresses in
NB-3337.1 General Requirements. Nozzles and Openings
other Category D connections (NB-3351) shall be NB-3338.1 General. For the purpose of determining
attached to the shell or head of the vessel by one of peak stresses around the opening, three acceptable
the methods provided in NB-3352. methods are listed below.
(a) Analytical Method. This method uses suitable
NB-3337.2 Full Penetration Welded Nozzles. Full analytical techniques such as finite element computer
penetration welds, as shown in Figs. NB-4244(a)-1, analyses, which provide detailed stress distributions
NB-4244(b)-1, NB-4244(c)-1, and NB-4244(e)-1 may around openings. In addition to peak stresses due to
be used (except as otherwise provided in NB-3337.3) pressure, the effects of other loadings shall be included.
for the purpose of achieving continuity of metal and The total peak stress at any given point shall be
facilitating the required radiographic examination. When determined by combining stresses due to pressure,
all or part of the required reinforcement is attributable thermal, and external loadings in accordance with the
to the nozzle, the nozzle shall be attached by full rules of NB-3200.
penetration welds through either the vessel or the nozzle (b) Experimental Stress Analysis. This is based on
thickness, or both. data from experiments (Appendix II).
(c) Stress Index Method. This uses various formulas
NB-3337.3 Partial Penetration Welded Nozzles together with available data obtained from an extensive
(a) Partial penetration welds, as shown in Figs. NB- series of tests covering a range of variation of applicable
4244(d)-1 and NB-4244(d)-2, are allowed only for dimensional ratios and configurations (NB-3338.2). This
nozzles on which there are substantially no piping method covers only single, isolated openings. Stress
reactions, such as control rod housings, pressurizer indices may also be determined by theoretical or experi-
heater wells, and openings for instrumentation. Earth- mental stress analysis.
quake loadings need not be considered in determining
whether piping reactions are substantial. For such noz- NB-3338.2 Stress Index Method
zles, all reinforcement shall be integral with the portion (a) The term stress index, as used herein, is defined
of the vessel penetrated. Partial penetration welds shall as the numerical ratio of the stress components st , sn,
be of sufficient size to develop the full strength of the and sr [Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-1] under consideration to
nozzles. Nozzles attached by partial penetration welds the computed membrane hoop stress in the unpenetrated
shall have an interference fit or a maximum diametral vessel material; however, the material which increases
clearance between the nozzle and the vessel penetra- the thickness of a vessel wall locally at the nozzle
tion of: shall not be included in the calculations of these stress
(1) 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) for d ≤ 1 in. (25 mm) components. When the thickness of the vessel wall is
(2) 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) for 1 in. (25 mm) < d increased over that required to the extent provided
≤ 4 in. (102 mm) hereinafter, the values of r1 and r2 in Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-
(3) 0.030 in. (0.76 mm) for d > 4 in. (102 mm) 2 shall be referred to the thickened section.
95
(d) The indices of Table NB-3338.2(c)-1 apply when

the conditions stipulated in (1) through (7) below exist.
(1) The opening is for a circular nozzle whose
axis is normal to the vessel wall. If the axis of the
nozzle makes an angle f with the normal to the vessel
wall and if d /D≤ 0.15, an estimate of the sn index
on the inside may be obtained from one of the following
formulas.
For hillside connections in spheres or cylinders:
K2 p K1 (1 + 2 sin2 f)
For lateral connections in cylinders:
K2 p K1 [1 + (tan f)4 / 3 ]
FIG. NB-3338.2(a)-1 DIRECTION OF
STRESS COMPONENTS
where
K1p the sn inside stress index of Table NB-
3338.2(c)-1 for a radial connection
K2p the estimated sn inside stress index for the non-
radial connection
(b) The nomenclature used in NB-3338 is defined (2) The arc distance measured between the center
as follows. lines of adjacent nozzles along the inside surface of
Rp inside radius, in corroded condition, of cylindri- the shell is not less than three times the sum of
cal vessel, spherical vessel, or spherical head, in. their inside radii for openings in a head or along the
Sp stress intensity (combined stress) at the point longitudinal axis of a shell and is not less than two
under consideration, psi times the sum of their radii for openings along the
tp nominal wall thickness, less corrosion allow- circumference of a cylindrical shell. When two nozzles
ance, of vessel or head, in. in a cylindrical shell are neither in a longitudinal line
snp stress component normal to the plane of the nor in a circumferential arc, their center line distance
section (ordinarily the circumferential stress along the inside surface of the shell shall be such that
around the hole in the shell), psi [(Lc /2)2 + (Ll /3)2]1 /2 is not less than the sum of their
sr p stress component normal to the boundary of the inside radii, where Lc is the component of the center
section, psi line distance in the circumferential direction and Ll is the
stp stress component in the plane of the section component of the center line distance in the longitudinal
under consideration and parallel to the boundary direction.
of the section, psi (3) The following dimensional ratios are met:
(c) When the conditions of (d) below are satisfied,
Ratio Cylinder Sphere
the stress indices of Table NB-3338.2(c)-1 may be used
for nozzles designed in accordance with the applicable D /t 10 to 100 10 to 100
d /D 0.5 max. 0.5 max.
rules of NB-3330. These stress indices deal only with
d / √ Dt ... 0.8 max.
the maximum stresses, at certain general locations, due
d / √Dtnr2 /t 1.5 max. ...
to internal pressure. In the evaluation of stresses in or
adjacent to vessel openings and connections, it is often
necessary to consider the effect of stresses due to where D is the inside shell diameter, t is the shell
external loadings or thermal stresses. In such cases, thickness, and d is the inside nozzle diameter. In the
the total stress at a given point may be determined by case of cylindrical shells, the total nozzle reinforcement
superposition. In the case of combined stresses due to area on the transverse axis of the connections, including
internal pressure and nozzle loading, the maximum any outside of the reinforcement limits, shall not exceed
stresses for a given location shall be considered as 200% of that required for the longitudinal axis (com-
acting at the same point and added algebraically unless pared to 50% permitted by Fig. NB-3332.2-1) unless
positive evidence is available to the contrary. a tapered transition section is incorporated into the
96
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-2
FIG. NB-3338.2(a)-2 NOZZLE DIMENSIONS
97
TABLE NB-3338.2(c)-1 NB-3339.1 Limitations. These alternative rules are

STRESS INDICES FOR NOZZLES applicable only to nozzles in vessels within the limita-
tions stipulated in (a) through (f) below.
Nozzles in Spherical Shells and Formed Heads (a) The nozzle is circular in cross section and its
Stress Inside Corner Outside Corner axis is normal to the vessel or head surface.
sn 2.0 2.0
(b) The nozzle and reinforcing (if required) are
st − 0.2 2.0 welded integrally into the vessel with full penetration
sr − 2t / R 0 welds. Details such as those shown in Figs. NB-4244(a)-
S 2.2 2.0 1, NB-4244(b)-1, and NB-4244(c)-1 are acceptable.
However, fillet welds shall be finished to a radius in
Nozzles in Cylindrical Shells
accordance with Fig. NB-3339.1(b)-1.
Longitudinal Plane Transverse Plane (c) In the case of spherical shells and formed heads,
at least 40% of the total nozzle reinforcement area
Stress Inside Outside Inside Outside shall be located beyond the outside surface of the
sn 3.1 1.2 1.0 2.1 minimum required vessel wall thickness.
st − 0.2 1.0 − 0.2 2.6 (d) The spacing between the edge of the opening
sr − t/R 0 − t/R 0 and the nearest edge of any other opening is not less
S 3.3 1.2 1.2 2.6
than the smaller of 1.25(d1 + d2) or 2.5√ Rt, but in
any case not less than d1 + d2, where d1 and d2 are
the inside diameters of the openings.
(e) The material used in the nozzle, reinforcing, and
vessel adjacent to the nozzle shall have a ratio of
reinforcement and the shell, meeting the requirements UTS /YS of not less than 1.5, where
of NB-3361. UTSp specified minimum ultimate tensile strength, ksi
(4) In the case of spherical shells and formed YSp specified minimum yield strength, ksi
heads, at least 40% of the total nozzle reinforcement (f) The following dimensional limitations are met:
area shall be located beyond the outside surface of the
minimum required vessel wall thickness. Nozzles in Spherical
Nozzles in Vessels or
(5) The inside corner radius r1 [Fig. NB-3338.2(a)- Cylindrical Vessels Hemispherical Heads
2] is between 10% and 100% of the shell thickness t.
(6) The outer corner radius r2 [Fig. NB-3338.2(a)- D /t 10 to 100 10 to 100
2] is large enough to provide a smooth transition d /D 0.5 max. 0.5 max.
between the nozzles and the shell. In addition, for d / √ Dt ... 0.8 max.
d / √Dtnr2 /t ...
opening diameters greater than 11⁄2 times the shell 1.5 max.
thickness in cylindrical shells and 2:1 ellipsoidal heads
and greater than three shell thicknesses in spherical
shells, the value of r2 shall be not less than one-half NB-3339.2 Nomenclature. The nomenclature used
the thickness of the shell or nozzle wall, whichever is in NB-3339 is defined as follows:
greater. Aap available reinforcing area, sq in.
(7) The radius r3 [Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-2] is not less Arp required minimum reinforcing area, sq in.
than the greater of the following: Dp inside diameter, in corroded condition, of cylin-
(a) 0.002u do, where do is the outside diameter drical vessel, spherical vessel, or spherical
of the nozzle and is as shown in Fig. NB-3338.2(a)- head, in.
2, and the angle u is expressed in degrees; dp inside diameter, in corroded condition, of the
(b) 2(sin u )3 times offset for the configuration nozzle, in.
shown in Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-2 sketches (a) and (b). Rp inside radius, in corroded condition, of cylindri-
cal vessel, spherical vessel, or spherical head, in.
tp nominal wall thickness, less corrosion allow-
NB-3339 Alternative Rules for Nozzle Design
ance, of vessel or head, in.
Subject to the limitations stipulated in NB-3339.1, the tnp nominal wall thickness, less corrosion allow-
requirements of this paragraph constitute an acceptable ance, of nozzle, in.
alternative to the rules of NB-3332 through NB-3336 trp wall thickness of vessel or head, computed by
and NB-3338. the equations given in NB-3324.1 for cylindrical
98
NB-3339.2 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3339.5
FIG. NB-3339.1(b)-1 EXAMPLES OF ACCEPTABLE TRANSITION DETAILS
vessels and in NB-3324.2 for spherical vessels TABLE NB-3339.3-1

or spherical heads, in. REQUIRED MINIMUM REINFORCING AREA Ar
tr np wall thickness of nozzle, computed by the equa-
tion given in NB-3324.1, in. Ar , sq in.
For the definitions of r1, r2, r3, r4, u, and u1 see Fig. Nozzles in Nozzles in Spherical
d /√ Rtr Cylinders Vessels or Heads
NB-3339.1(b)-1; for Lc and Ln see Fig. NB-3339.4-1;
for S, st , sn, and sr see NB-3338.2 and Fig. NB- < 0.20 None [Note (1)] None [Note (1)]
3338.2(a)-1.
> 0.20 and [4.05(d / √ Rtr)1/2 [5.40(d / √ Rtr)1/2–2.41]dtr
NB-3339.3 Required Reinforcement Area. The re- < 0.40 –1.81]dtr
quired minimum reinforcing area is related to the value
> 0.40 0.75dtr dtr cos f
of d / √ Rtr as tabulated in Table NB-3339.3-1. The f p sin−1 (d/D)
required minimum reinforcing area shall be provided NOTE:
in all planes containing the nozzle axis. (1) The transition radius r2, shown in Fig. NB-3339.1(b)-1, or the
equivalent thereof is required.
NB-3339.4 Limits of Reinforcing Zone. Reinforcing
metal included in meeting the minimum required rein-
forcing area specified in Table NB-3339.3-1 must be
located within the reinforcing zone boundary shown in
Fig. NB-3339.4-1. intensity value Sm is used, the area provided by such
material shall be increased in proportion to the inverse
NB-3339.5 Strength of Reinforcing Material Re- ratio of the stress values of the nozzle and the vessel
quirements. Material in the nozzle wall used for rein- wall material. No reduction in the reinforcing area
forcing shall preferably be the same as that of the requirement shall be taken for the increased strength
vessel wall. If material with a lower design stress of nozzle material or weld metal which has a higher
99
FIG. NB-3339.4-1 LIMITS OF REINFORCING ZONE
design stress intensity value than that of the material NB-3339.7 Stress Indices
of the vessel wall. The strength of the material at the (a) The term stress index, as used herein, is defined
point under consideration shall be used in fatigue as the numerical ratio of the stress components st , sn ,
analyses. The mean coefficient of thermal expansion and sr , under consideration, to the computed stress s.
of metal to be included as reinforcement shall be within (b) The nomenclature for the stress components is
15% of the value for the metal of the vessel wall. shown in Fig. NB-3338.2(a)-1 and is defined as follows:
Pp service pressure, psi
NB-3339.6 Transition Details. Examples of accept- Sp stress intensity (combined stress) at the point
able transition tapers and radii are shown in Fig. under consideration, psi
NB-3339.1(b)-1. Other configurations which meet the sp P(D + t) /4t for nozzles in spherical vessels or
reinforcing area requirements of NB-3339.3 and with heads, psi
equivalent or less severe transitions are also acceptable; p P(D + t) /2t for nozzles in cylindrical vessels, psi
e.g., larger radius–thickness ratios. snp stress component normal to the plane of the
100
NB-3339.7 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3351.3
TABLE NB-3339.7(c)-1 NB-3340 ANALYSIS OF VESSELS

STRESS INDICES FOR INTERNAL
PRESSURE LOADING The provisions of NB-3214 apply.
Nozzles in Spherical Shells and Spherical Heads

Stress Inside Outside NB-3350 DESIGN OF WELDED
sn 2.0 − d/D 2.0 − d/D CONSTRUCTION
st −0.2 2.0 − d/D NB-3351 Welded Joint Category
sr −4t /(D + t) 0
The term Category defines the location of a joint
in a vessel, but not the type of joint. The categories
S larger of: 2.2 − d/D or 2.0 − d/D established are for use in specifying special requirements
2.0 + [4t /(D + t)] − d/D regarding joint type and degree of examination for
Nozzles in Cylindrical Shells certain welded joints. Since these special requirements,
which are based on service, material, and thickness,
Longitudinal Plane Transverse Plane
do not apply to every welded joint, only those joints
Stress Inside Outside Inside Outside to which special requirements apply are included in
sn 3.1 1.2 1.0 2.1 the categories. The special requirements apply to joints
of a given category only when specifically stated. The
st −0.2 1.0 −0.2 2.6 joints included in each category are designated as joints
of Categories A, B, C, and D. Figure NB-3351-1
sr −2t /(D + t) 0 −2t /(D + t) 0
illustrates typical joint locations included in each cat-
S 3.3 1.2 1.2 2.6 egory.
NB-3351.1 Category A. Category A comprises longi-

tudinal welded joints within the main shell, communicat-
ing chambers,13 transitions in diameter, or nozzles; any
welded joint within a sphere, within a formed or flat
head, or within the side plates14 of a flat sided vessel; and
section (ordinarily the circumferential stress circumferential welded joints connecting hemispherical
around the hole in the shell), psi heads to main shells, to transitions in diameters, to
srp stress component normal to the boundary of the nozzles, or to communicating chambers.
section, psi
stp stress component in the plane of the section NB-3351.2 Category B. Category B comprises cir-
under consideration and parallel to the boundary cumferential welded joints within the main shell, com-
of the section, psi municating chambers, nozzles, or transitions in diameter,
(c) When the conditions of NB-3339.1 through NB- including joints between the transition and a cylinder
3339.6 are satisfied, the stress indices given in Table at either the large or small end; and circumferential
NB-3339.7(c)-1 may be used. These stress indices deal welded joints connecting formed heads other than hemi-
only with the maximum stresses, at certain general spherical to main shells, to transitions in diameter, to
locations, due to internal pressure. In the evaluation nozzles, or to communicating chambers.
of stresses in or adjacent to vessel openings and connec- NB-3351.3 Category C. Category C comprises
tions, it is often necessary to consider the effect of welded joints connecting flanges, Van Stone laps, tube-
stresses due to external loadings or thermal stresses. sheets, or flat heads to main shell, to formed heads, to
In such cases, the total stress at a given point may be transitions in diameter, to nozzles, or to communicating
determined by superposition. In the case of combined chambers13 any welded joint connecting one side plate14
stresses due to internal pressure and nozzle loading, to another side plate of a flat sided vessel.
the maximum stresses shall be considered as acting at
the same point and added algebraically. If the stresses
13 Communicating chambers are defined as portions of the vessel
are otherwise determined by more accurate analytical
which intersect the shell or heads of a vessel and form an integral
techniques or by the experimental stress analysis proce- part of the pressure-retaining closure, e.g., sumps.
dure of Appendix II, the stresses are also to be added 14 Side plates of a flat sided vessel are defined as any of the flat
algebraically. plates forming an integral part of the pressure-retaining enclosure.
101
FIG. NB-3351-1 WELDED JOINT LOCATIONS TYPICAL OF CATEGORIES A, B, C, AND D
NB-3351.4 Category D. Category D comprises NB-3352.3 Joints of Category C. All welded joints
welded joints connecting communicating chambers or of Category C as defined in NB-3351 shall meet the
nozzles to main shells, to spheres, to transitions in fabrication requirements of NB-4243 and shall be capa-
diameter, to heads, or to flat sided vessels, and those ble of being examined in accordance with NB-5230.
joints connecting nozzles to communicating chambers. Minimum dimensions of the welds and throat thickness
For nozzles at the small end of a transition in diameter, shall be as shown in Fig. NB-4243-1 where:
see Category B. (a) for forged tubesheets, forged flat heads, and
forged flanges with the weld preparation bevel angle
not greater than 45 deg. measured from the face:
NB-3352 Permissible Types of Welded Joints
t, tnp nominal thicknesses of welded parts, in.
The design of the vessel shall meet the requirements tcp 0.7tn or 1⁄4 in. (6 mm), whichever is less
for each category of joint. Butt joints are full penetration twp tn /2 or t /4, whichever is less
joints between plates or other elements that lie approxi- (b) for all other material forms and for forged tube-
mately in the same plane. Category B angle joints sheets, forged flat heads, and forged flanges with the
between plates or other elements that have an offset weld preparation bevel angle greater than 45 deg.
angle a not exceeding 30 deg. are considered as meeting measured from the face:
the requirements for butt joints. Figure NB-3352-1 t, tnp nominal thicknesses of welded parts, in.
shows typical butt welds for each category joint. tcp 0.7tn or 1⁄4 in. (6 mm), whichever is less
twp tn or t /2, whichever is less
NB-3352.1 Joints of Category A. All welded joints
of Category A as defined in NB-3351 shall meet the
NB-3352.4 Joints of Category D. All welded joints
fabrication requirements of NB-4241 and shall be capa-
of Category D as defined in NB-3351 shall be in
ble of being examined in accordance with NB-5210.
accordance with the requirements of one of (a) through
NB-3352.2 Joints of Category B. All welded joints (e) below.
of Category B as defined in NB-3351 shall meet the (a) Butt Welded Nozzles. Nozzles shall meet the
fabrication requirements of NB-4242 and shall be capa- fabrication requirements of NB-4244(a) and shall be
ble of being examined in accordance with NB-5220. capable of being examined in accordance with NB-
When joints with opposing lips to form an integral 5242. The minimum dimensions and geometrical re-
backing strip or joints with backing strips not later quirements of Fig. NB-4244(a)-1 shall be met, where
removed are used, the suitability for cyclic service shall r1p 1⁄4t or 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), whichever is less
be analyzed by the method of NB-3222.4 using a r2p 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) minimum
fatigue strength reduction factor of not less than 2. tp nominal thickness of part penetrated, in.
102
NB-3352.4 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3352.4
FIG. NB-3352-1 TYPICAL BUTT JOINTS
tnp nominal thickness of penetrating part, in. the base metal, the weld metal, and the nozzle shall
(b) Full Penetration Corner Welded Nozzles. Nozzles not differ by more than 15% of the lowest coefficient
shall meet the fabrication requirements of NB-4244(b) involved.
and shall be capable of being examined as required in (3) The minimum dimensions of Fig. NB-4244(c)-
NB-5243. The minimum dimensions of Fig. NB- 1 shall be met, where
4244(b)-1 shall be met, where r1p 1⁄4t or 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), whichever is less
r1p 1⁄4t or 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), whichever is less tp nominal thickness of part penetrated, in.
r2p 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) minimum tcp 0.7tn or 1⁄4 in. (6 mm), whichever is less
tp nominal thickness of part penetrated, in. tnp nominal thickness of penetrating part, in.
tcp 0.7tn or 1⁄4 in. (6 mm), whichever is less (4) The corners of the end of each nozzle neck
tnp nominal thickness of penetrating part, in. extending less than √ dtn beyond the inner surface of
(c) Use of Deposited Weld Metal for Openings and the part penetrated shall be rounded to a radius of
Nozzles one-half the thickness tn of the nozzle neck or 3⁄4 in.
(1) Nozzles shall meet the fabrication requirements (19 mm), whichever is smaller.
of NB-4244(c) and shall be capable of being examined (d) Attachment of Nozzles Using Partial Penetration
in accordance with NB-5244. Welds
(2) When the deposited weld metal is used as (1) Partial penetration welds used to connect noz-
reinforcement, the coefficients of thermal expansion of zles as permitted in NB-3337.3 shall meet the fabrication
103
requirements of NB-4244(d) and shall be capable of (6) The minimum dimensions of Fig. NB-4244(e)-
being examined in accordance with the requirements 1 shall be met, where
of NB-5245. r1p 1⁄2t or 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), whichever is less
(2) The minimum dimensions of Figs. NB-4244(d)- tp nominal thickness of part penetrated, in.
1 and NB-4244(d)-2 shall be met, where tcp 0.7tn or 1⁄4 in. (6 mm), whichever is less
dp outside diameter of nozzle or of the inner cylin- tnp nominal thickness of penetrating part, in.
der as shown in Fig. NB-4244(d)-2
r1p 1⁄4tn or 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), whichever is less NB-3354 Structural Attachment Welds
r2p 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) minimum
r3p r2 or equivalent chamfer minimum Welds for structural attachments shall meet the re-
r4p 1⁄2tn or 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), whichever is less quirements of NB-4430.
tp nominal thickness of part penetrated, in.
tcp 0.7tn or 1⁄4 in. (6 mm), whichever is less NB-3355 Welding Grooves
tnp nominal thickness of penetrating part or the
The dimensions and shape of the edges to be joined
lesser of tn1 or tn2 in Fig. NB-4244(d)-2, in.
shall be such as to permit complete fusion and complete
lp 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) minimum
joint penetration, except as otherwise permitted in NB-
lp tn maximum, in.
3352.4.
(3) The corners of the end of each nozzle, ex-
tending less than √ dtn beyond the inner surface of
the part penetrated, shall be rounded to a radius of NB-3357 Thermal Treatment
one-half of the thickness tn of the penetrating part or All vessels and vessel parts shall be given the
3⁄ in. (19 mm), whichever is smaller.
4 appropriate postweld heat treatment prescribed in
(4) Weld groove design for partial penetration NB-4620.
joints attaching nozzles may require special consider-
ation to achieve the 1.25tn minimum depth of weld
and adequate access for welding examination. The welds NB-3360 SPECIAL VESSEL REQUIREMENTS
shown in the sketches of Figs. NB-4244(d)-1 and NB- NB-3361 Category A or B Joints Between
4244(d)-2 may be on either the inside or the outside Sections of Unequal Thickness
of the vessel shell. Weld preparation may be J-groove
as shown in the figures or straight bevel. In general, a tapered transition section as shown in
(5) A fatigue strength reduction factor of not less Fig. NB-3361-1 which is a type of gross structural
than four shall be used when fatigue analysis is required. discontinuity (NB-3213.2) shall be provided at joints
(e) Oblique Full Penetration Nozzles. Internal or of Categories A and B between sections that differ in
external nozzles shall meet the fabrication requirements thickness by more than one-fourth the thickness of the
of NB-4244(e) and shall be capable of being examined thinner section. The transition section may be formed
by any process that will provide a uniform taper. An
in accordance with NB-5246. Radiography of the nozzle
ellipsoidal or hemispherical head which has a greater
weld may be waived by NB-5246, provided the require-
thickness than a cylinder of the same inside diameter
ments of (1) through (6) below are met.
may be machined to the outside diameter of the cylinder
(1) The inside nozzle diameter shall not exceed
provided the remaining thickness is at least as great
6 in.
as that required for a shell of the same diameter. A
(2) The angle which the nozzle axis makes with uniform taper is not required for flanged hubs. The
the vessel wall at the point of attachment shall not be adequacy of the transition shall be evaluated by stress
smaller than 40 deg. analysis. Stress intensity limitations are given in NB-
(3) The opening shall be completely reinforced, 3220. The requirements of this paragraph do not apply
with the reinforcement located in the shell or head of to flange hubs.
the vessel.
(4) The nozzle shall be subjected to essentially
no pipe reactions and no thermal stresses greater than NB-3362 Bolted Flange Connections
in the vessel itself. It is recommended that the dimensional requirements
(5) The nozzle wall and the weld shall develop of bolted flange connections to external piping conform
the full strength of the nozzle. to ANSI B16.5, Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
104
NB-3363 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3412.2
NB-3400 PUMP DESIGN

NB-3410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
NB-3411 Scope
NB-3411.1 Applicability. The rules of NB-3400
apply to (a) through (j) below.
(a) pump casings
(b) pump inlets and outlets
(c) pump covers
(d) clamping rings
(e) seal housing and seal glands
(f) related bolting
(g) pump internal heat exchanger piping
(h) pump auxiliary nozzle connections up to the face
of the first flange or circumferential joint in welded
connections, excluding the connecting weld
(i) piping identified with the pump and external to
FIG. NB-3361-1 CATEGORY A AND B JOINTS and forming part of the pressure-retaining boundary
BETWEEN SECTIONS OF UNEQUAL THICKNESS and supplied with the pump
(j) mounting feet or pedestal supports when inte-
grally attached to the pump pressure-retaining boundary
and supplied with the pump
NB-3411.2 Exemptions. The rules of NB-3400 do 98

NB-3363 Access Openings not apply to (a) through (c) below.
Access openings, where provided, shall consist of (a) pump shafts and impellers; shafts may be de-
handhole or manhole openings having removable covers. signed in accordance with Appendix S
These may be located on either the inside or outside (b) nonstructural internals
of the shell or head openings and may be attached by (c) seal packages
studs or bolts in combination with gaskets or welded
membrane seals or strength welds. Plugs using pipe
threads are not permitted. NB-3412 Acceptability
NB-3412.1 Acceptability of Large Pumps. The re- 98
quirements for the design acceptability of pumps having
an inlet connection greater than 4 in. nominal pipe
NB-3364 Attachments
size (DN 100) diameter are given in (a), (b), and (c)
Attachments used to transmit support loads shall below.
meet the requirements of NB-3135. (a) The design shall be such that the requirements
of NB-3100 and of NB-3200 or Appendix II (provided
the requirements of NB-3414 and the minimum wall
thicknesses of NB-3430 are met) are satisfied.
NB-3365 Supports (b) The rules of this Subarticle shall be met. In cases
of conflict between NB-3100 and NB-3200 or Appendix
All vessels shall be so supported and the supporting II and NB-3400, the requirements of NB-3400 apply.
members shall be arranged and attached to the vessel (c) The requirements for prevention of nonductile
wall in such a way as to provide for the maximum fracture as set forth in NB-3211(d) shall be met.
imposed loadings. The stresses produced in the vessel
by such loadings and by steady state and transient NB-3412.2 Acceptability of Small Pumps. The re-
thermal conditions shall be subjected to the stress limits quirements for the design acceptability of pumps having
of this Subsection. Additional requirements are given an inlet connection 4 in. nominal pipe size (DN 100)
in NCA-3240 and Subsection NF. diameter or smaller are given in (a) and (b) below.
105
(a) The design shall be such that the requirements NB-3420 DEFINITIONS
of NB-3100 or Appendix II are satisfied.
NB-3421 Radially Split Casing
(b) The rules of this Subarticle shall be met. In cases
of conflict between NB-3100 or Appendix II and NB- A radially split casing shall be interpreted as one
3400, the requirements of this Subarticle shall apply. in which the primary sealing joint is radially disposed
around the shaft.
NB-3414 Design and Service Conditions NB-3422 Axially Split Casing

The general design considerations, including defini- An axially split casing shall be interpreted as one
tions of NB-3100 plus the requirements of NB-3320, in which the primary sealing joint is axially disposed
NB-3330, NB-3361, and NB-3362 are applicable to with respect to the shaft.
pumps.
NB-3423 Single and Double Volute Casings

NB-3415 Loads From Connected Piping Figures NB-3423-1 and NB-3423-2 show typical
single and double volute casings, respectively.
(a) Loads imposed on pump inlets and outlets by
connected piping shall be considered in the pump casing
design. The forces and moments produced by the
connected piping on each pump inlet and outlet shall NB-3424 Seal Housing
be provided by the Owner in the Design Specifications. Seal housing is defined as that portion of the pump
(b) Stresses generated in the pump casing by the cover or casing assembly which contains the seal and
connected piping shall be combined with the pressure forms a part of the primary pressure boundary.
stresses in accordance with the requirements of NB-
3200.
NB-3425 Typical Examples of Pump Types
Figures NB-3441.1-1 through NB-3441.6(a)-1 are
NB-3417 Earthquake Loadings typical examples to aid in the determination of pump
type and are not to be considered as limiting. Bearing
(a) The effects of earthquake shall be considered in locations and inlet and outlet orientations are optional.
the design of pumps, pump supports, and restraints.
The stresses resulting from these earthquake effects shall
be included with the stresses resulting from pressure or
other applied loads. NB-3430 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR
(b) Where pumps are provided with drivers on ex- CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
tended supporting structures and these structures are
essential to maintaining pressure integrity, an analysis NB-3431 Design of Welding
shall be performed when required by the Design Speci- (a) The design of welded construction shall be in
fications. accordance with NB-3350.
(b) Partial penetration welds are permitted for piping
connections 2 in. nominal pipe size and less when the
requirements of NB-3337.3 and NB-3352.4(d) are met.
NB-3418 Corrosion
The requirements of NB-3121 apply.
NB-3432 Cutwater Tip Stresses
(a) It is recognized that localized high stresses may
occur at the cutwater tips of volute casings (Fig. NB-
NB-3419 Cladding
3441.3-2). Adequacy of the design in this area shall
Cladding dimensions used in the design of pumps be demonstrated either by an investigation through
shall be required as in NB-3122. experimental stress analysis in accordance with Appen-
106
NB-3432 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3435.2
(b) To avoid stress concentrations, the outside radius

r2 in Fig. NB-3441.3-2 shall not be less than one-half
the thickness of the inlets and outlets as reinforced.
NB-3433.2 Radially Oriented Inlets and Outlets.

Reinforcement of radially oriented inlets and outlets in
accordance with the rules of NB-3331 through NB-
3336 is required.
NB-3433.3 Tangential Inlets and Outlets. Except

as modified in NB-3433.4, any design which has been
demonstrated to be satisfactory for the specified Design
Loadings may be used.
NB-3433.4 Minimum Inlet and Outlet Wall Thick-

nesses. The wall thickness of the inlet or outlet shall
not be less than the minimum wall thickness of the
FIG. NB-3423-1 casing for a distance l as shown in Fig. NB-3433.4-
TYPICAL SINGLE VOLUTE CASING 1. The wall thickness beyond the distance l may be
reduced to the minimum wall thickness of the connected
piping. The change in wall thickness shall be gradual
and have a maximum slope as indicated in Fig. NB-
4250-1. The distance l in Fig. NB-3433.4-1 is the limit
of reinforcement. The value of l, in., shall be determined
from the relationship:
l p 0.5 √ rm tm
where
rip inlet or outlet inside radius, in.
p di /2
rmp ri + 0.5tm, in.
tmp mean inlet or outlet wall thickness, in., taken
between section x–x and a parallel section y–y
FIG. NB-3423-2
TYPICAL DOUBLE VOLUTE CASING NB-3434 Bolting
Bolting in axisymmetric arrangements involving the
dix II or by detailing satisfactory service performance pressure boundary shall be designed in accordance with
of other pumps under similar operating conditions. NB-3230.
(b) Where experimental stress analysis is used, stress
intensity at this point shall meet the requirements of
NB-3222. NB-3435 Piping
NB-3435.1 Piping Under External Pressure. Piping
NB-3433 Reinforcement of Pump Casing Inlets located within the pressure-retaining boundary of the
and Outlets pump shall be designed in accordance with NB-3133.
NB-3433.1 Axially Oriented Inlets and Outlets NB-3435.2 Piping Under Internal Pressure. Piping
(a) An axially oriented pump casing inlet or outlet identified with the pump and external to or forming a
shall be considered similar to an opening in a vessel part of the pressure-retaining boundary, such as auxiliary
and shall be reinforced. It shall be treated as required water connections, shall be designed in accordance with
in NB-3331 through NB-3336. NB-3600.
107
NB-3440 DESIGN OF SPECIFIC PUMP

TYPES
NB-3441 Standard Pump Types
NB-3441.1 Design of Type A Pumps. Type A pumps
are those having single volutes and radially split casings
with single suction, as illustrated in Figs. NB-3441.1-
1 and NB-3441.1-2. Their design shall be in accordance
with the requirements of this Subarticle.
NB-3441.2 Design of Type B Pumps. Type B pumps
are those having single volutes and radially split casings
with double suction, as illustrated in Fig. NB-3441.2-
1. Their design shall be in accordance with the require-
ments of this Subarticle.
NB-3441.3 Design of Type C Pumps. Type C pumps
are those having double volutes and radially split casings
with single suction, as illustrated in Figs. NB-3441.3-
1 and NB-3441.3-2. The splitter is considered a struc-
FIG. NB-3433.4-1 MINIMUM TANGENTIAL INLET
AND OUTLET WALL THICKNESS tural part of the casing. Casing design shall be in
accordance with the requirements of this Subarticle and
with those given in (a) through (d) below.
(a) Casing Wall Thickness. Except where specifically
indicated in these rules, no portion of the casing wall
shall be thinner than the value of t determined as
NB-3436 Attachments follows:
(a) External and internal attachments to pumps shall
be designed so as not to cause excessive localized t p (0.63 × P × A) / Sm
bending stresses or harmful thermal gradients in the
pump as determined by the rules of NB-3200. Such where
attachments shall be designed to minimize stress concen- Ap scroll dimension inside casing as shown in Fig.
trations in applications where the number of stress NB-3441.3-2, in.
cycles, due either to pressure or thermal effect, is Pp Design Pressure, psig
relatively large for the expected life of the equipment. Smp allowable stress intensity for casing material at
(b) Attachments shall meet the requirements of Design Temperature, psi
NB-3135. tp minimum allowable wall thickness, in.
(b) Splitter Wall Thickness
(1) The splitter shall have a minimum wall thick-
ness of t as determined above for the casing wall and
shall extend from point B in Fig. 3441.3-2 through a
NB-3437 Pump Covers minimum angle of 135 deg. to point C. Beyond point
Pump covers shall be designed in accordance with C, the splitter wall may be reduced in thickness and
NB-3200. tapered to blend with the cutwater tip radius.
(2) Cutwater tip and splitter tip radii shall not be
less than 0.05t.
(3) All cutwater and splitter fillets, including the
tips, where they meet the casing wall, shall have a
minimum radius of 0.10t or 0.25 in. (6 mm), whichever
NB-3438 Supports
is greater.
Pump supports shall be designed in accordance with (c) Crotch Radius (Fig. NB-3441.3-2). The crotch
the requirements of Subsection NF unless included radius shall not be less than 0.3t.
under the rules of NB-3411.1(j). (d) Bottom of Casing
108
NB-3441.3 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3442
(1) That section of the pump casing within the

diameter defined by dimension A in Fig. NB-3441.3-
2 on the inlet side of the casing, normally referred to
as the bottom of the casing (Fig. NB-3441.3-1), shall
have a wall thickness no less than the value of t
determined in (a) above.
(2) The casing surface shall be analyzed in accord-
ance with an acceptable procedure, such as that shown
for flat heads in A-5000, or by an experimental stress
technique, such as described in Appendix II.
(3) The minimum permissible thickness of the FIG. NB-3441.1-1 TYPE A PUMP
bottom of the casing shall be the lesser of the value
determined by the analysis in (2) above and the value
obtained from the calculation shown in (a) above.
NB-3441.4 Design of Type D Pumps
(a) Type D pumps are those having double volutes
and radially split casings with double suction as illus-
trated in Fig. NB-3441.4(a)-1. The design shall be in
accordance with this Subarticle.
(b) The requirements of NB-3441.3(a), (b), and (c),
governing casing wall thickness, splitter wall thickness,
and crotch radius, apply.
(c) In the casing portion between the cover and the
casing wall, a wall thickness in excess of t may be
required.
NB-3441.5 Design of Type E Pumps. Type E pumps FIG. NB-3441.1-2 TYPE A PUMP
are those having volute type radially split casings and
multivane diffusers which form structural parts of the
casing as illustrated in Fig. NB-3441.5-1. The design
shall be in accordance with this Subarticle.
NB-3441.6 Design of Type F Pumps
(a) Type F pumps are those having radially split,
axisymmetric casings with either tangential or radial
outlets as illustrated in Fig. NB-3441.6(a)-1. The basic
configuration of a Type F pump casing is a shell with
a dished head attached at one end and a bolting flange
at the other. The inlet enters through the dished head,
and the outlet may be either tangent to the side or FIG. NB-3441.2-1 TYPE B PUMP
normal to the center line of the casing. Variations of
these inlet and outlet locations are permitted.
(b) The design of Type F pumps shall be in accord-
ance with this Subarticle.
NB-3442 Special Pump Types — Type J

Pumps
(a) Type J pumps are those that cannot logically be
classified with any of the preceding types.
(b) Any design method which has been demonstrated
to be satisfactory for the specified Design Conditions
may be used. FIG. NB-3441.3-1 TYPE C PUMP
109
FIG. NB-3441.3-2 TYPE C PUMP
NB-3500 VALVE DESIGN set forth in NB-3211(d) shall be met. The requirements
of NCA-3254(a) for specifying the location of valve
NB-3510 ACCEPTABILITY15 boundary jurisdiction may be considered to have been
NB-3511 General Requirements16, 17 met by employing the minimum limits of NB-1131,
unless the Design Specification extends the boundary
The requirements for design acceptability for valves of jurisdiction beyond these minimum limits. The re-
shall be those given in this Subarticle. In all cases, quirements of NCA-3254(b) for specifying the boundary
pressure–temperature rating shall be as given in NB- conditions are not applicable to valve end connections.
3530 and, except for NB-3512.2(d) and in local regions
(NB-3221.2), the wall thickness of the valve body
shall not be less than that given by NB-3541. The NB-3512 Acceptability of Large Valves
requirements for prevention of nonductile fracture as
Valve designs having an inlet piping connection
15 These requirements for the acceptability of a valve design are not larger than 4 in. nominal pipe size are acceptable when
intended to ensure the functional adequacy of the valve. However, they satisfy either the standard design rules or one of
for pressure relief valves the Designer is cautioned that the require- the alternative design rules.
ments of NB-7000 relative to set pressure, lift, blowdown, and
closure shall be met.
16 CAUTIONARY NOTE: Certain types of double seated valves have
NB-3512.1 Standard Design Rules. The design shall
the capability of trapping liquid in the body or bonnet cavity in the
be such that requirements of this Subarticle are met.
closed position. If such a cavity accumulates liquid and is in the The requirements of NB-3530 through NB-3550 apply
closed position at a time when adjacent system piping is increasing to valves of conventional shape having generally cylin-
in temperature, a substantial and uncontrolled increase in pressure
in the body or bonnet cavity may result. Where such a condition
drical or spherical bodies with a single neck of a
is possible, it is the responsibility of the Owner or the Owner’s diameter commensurate with that of the main body
designee to provide, or require to be provided, protection against portion, such as having a neck inside diameter less
harmful overpressure in such valves.
17 The severity and frequency of specified fluid temperature variations
than twice the main run inside diameter in the neck
may be such that the period of calculated pressure integrity is less
region.
than plant design life. In such cases it is the responsibility of the
Certificate Holder to state these conditions in the Design Report NB-3512.2 Alternative Design Rules. A valve design 98
(NB-3560). may not satisfy all of the requirements of NB-3512.1.
110
NB-3512.2 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3512.2
A design may be accepted provided it meets one of

the alternatives listed in (a), (b), (c), or (d) below.
(a) When the valve design satisfies the rules of NB-
3530 through NB-3546.2 with thermal stresses ne-
glected, the rules of NB-3200 relative to accounting
for thermal secondary stresses and fatigue analysis
[NB-3222.2, NB-3222.3, and NB-3222.4] shall also be
satisfied.
(b) When a valve is exempted from fatigue analysis
by the rules of NB-3222.4(d), the design is acceptable,
FIG. NB-3441.4(a)-1 TYPE D PUMP provided that the requirements of (1) or (2) below
are met.
(1) The rules of NB-3530 through NB-3546 shall
be met. The rules of NB-3200 may be substituted for
those of NB-3545.2 for evaluating secondary stresses,
and NB-3545.3 need not be considered.
(2) The rules of NB-3530 and NB-3541 shall be
met. An experimental stress analysis is performed in
accordance with Appendix II, and the rules of NB-
3200 with respect to primary and secondary stresses
resulting from pressure and mechanical loads shall be
met. Unless otherwise specified in the Design Specifica-
tions, the pipe reactions shall be taken as those loads
which produce a stress [NB-3545.2(b)] of 0.5 times
the yield strength of the piping in tension for the direct
or axial load and a stress of 1.0 times the yield strength
of the piping in bending and torsion. Thermal secondary
stresses shall be accounted for by either the rules of
NB-3200 or NB-3545.
(c) When a valve design satisfies the rules of NB-
3530 and NB-3541, and when an experimental stress
analysis has been performed upon a similar valve in
FIG. NB-3441.5-1 TYPE E PUMP
accordance with Appendix II, and an acceptable analytic
method has been established, the results may be used
in conjunction with the requirements of NB-3200 for
pressure and mechanical loads to establish design ac-
ceptability. Accommodation of thermal secondary
stresses and pipe reactions shall be as given in NB-
3512.2(b)(2). Requirements for fatigue analysis of either
NB-3200 or NB-3550 shall be met.
(d) When permitted by the Design Specification, a
weld end valve that does not meet all of the requirements
of NB-3540 may be designed so that it meets the
requirements of NB-3200 for all pressure-retaining parts
and those parts defined by NB-3546.3(a), and shall
also meet all of the following requirements.
(1) Pressure, thermal, and mechanical effects, such
as those resulting from earthquake, maximum stem
force, closure force, assembly forces, and others that
may be defined in the Design Specification, shall be
included in the design analysis. For Level A Service
Limits, the pipe reaction effects are to be determined
FIG. NB-3441.6(a)-1 TYPE F PUMP by considering that the maximum fiber stress in the
111
connected pipe is at one-half of its yield strength in to the applicable pressure–temperature rating. When the
direct tension and at its yield strength in torsion and Special Class Ratings of ANSI B16.34 apply, the NDE
in bending in the plane of the neck and run, and also exemptions of NB-2510 shall not be used.
in the plane of the run perpendicular to the neck,
each considered separately. The individual pipe reaction NB-3513.2 Alternative Design Rules. A valve design
effects that result in the maximum stress intensity at shall satisfy the requirements of NB-3512.2.
all points, including all other effects, shall be used for
the analysis to satisfy the rules of NB-3200. The valve NB-3515 Acceptability of Metal Bellows and
Design Specification shall provide the loadings and
Metal Diaphragm Stem Sealed Valves
operating requirements to be considered under Level
B, C, and D Service Limits [NCA-3252(a)(6)] for which Valves using metal bellows or metal diaphragm stem
a design analysis is to be included in the Design Report. seals shall be constructed in accordance with the rules
(2) In place of using the values of Sm to satisfy of this Subarticle, based on the assumption that the
the rules of NB-3200, the allowable stress intensity bellows or diaphragms do not retain pressure, and
values for ferritic valve body and bonnet materials Design Pressure is imposed on a required backup stem
shall be those allowable stress values given in Section seal such as packing. The bellows or diaphragms need
II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 1A. For materials in Section not be constructed in accordance with the requirements
II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B, a reduced of this Section.
allowable stress intensity based on applying a factor
of 0.67 to the yield strengths listed in Section II, Part
D, Subpart 1, Table Y-1 shall be used. NB-3520 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
(3) The adequacy of the stress analysis of the
body and bonnet shall be verified by experimental stress NB-3521 Design and Service Loadings
analysis conducted in accordance with the requirements The general design considerations of NB-3100 are
of II-1100 through II-1400. Individual tests shall be applicable to valves. In case of conflict between NB-
made to verify the adequacy of the stress analysis of 3100 and NB-3500, the requirements of NB-3500 shall
internal pressure effects and pipe reaction effects. Tests apply.
shall be made on at least one valve model of a given
configuration, but a verified analytical procedure may
then be applied to other valves of the same configuration, NB-3524 Earthquake
although they may be of different size or pressure
rating. The geometrical differences shall be accounted The rules of this Subarticle consider that under
for in the extrapolation stress analysis. The analytical earthquake loadings the piping system, not the valve,
procedure shall have verified capability of providing will be limiting and that the integrity of the valve
this extrapolation. pressure-retaining body is adequately considered under
(4) A Design Report shall be prepared in sufficient the piping requirements of NB-3600. Where valves are
detail to show that the valve satisfies all applicable provided with operators having extended structures and
requirements. these structures are essential to maintaining pressure
(5) Prior to installation, the valve shall be hydro- integrity, an analysis, when required by the Design
statically tested in accordance with NB-3531.2. For this Specifications, may be performed based on static forces
purpose, the primary pressure rating shall be determined resulting from equivalent earthquake accelerations acting
by interpolation in accordance with NB-3543(c). at the centers of gravity of the extended masses.
NB-3513 Acceptability of Small Valves NB-3525 Levels A and B Service Limits
Valve designs having an inlet piping connection 4 The design rules of NB-3512 and NB-3513 apply
in. nominal pipe size or less are acceptable when they to loadings for which Level A or B Limits are designated
satisfy either the standard design rules or the alternative except that when evaluating Level B Limits during
design rules. operation of relief or safety valves (a) and (b) below
shall be met.
NB-3513.1 Standard Design Rules. The design shall (a) The service pressure may exceed the Design
be such that the requirements of NB-3530 and NB- Pressures defined by the pressure-temperature ratings
3541 shall be met for wall thicknesses corresponding of ANSI B16.34 by no more than 10%.
112
NB-3525 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3531.2
(b) The rules of NB-3540 apply using allowable welding end) valves, provided the Design Pressure and
stress intensity values of 110% of those listed in Section Design Temperature are used. When a single valve has
II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B. a flanged and a welding end, the flanged end require-
ments shall be used. The materials18 listed in ANSI
B16.34, Table 1, may be used if listed in Section II,
NB-3526 Level C Service Limits
Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B, subject to
If the Design Specifications specify any loadings for the temperature limitations therein, and as defined in
which Level C Limits are designated, the rules used NCA-1220.
in evaluating these loadings shall be those of NB-3512
NB-3531.2 Hydrostatic Tests
and NB-3513, except as modified by the following
(a) Valves designed in accordance with NB-3541
subparagraphs.
shall be subjected to the shell hydrostatic test pressures
NB-3526.1 Pressure–Temperature Ratings. The required by ANSI B16.34 and in accordance with other
pressure permissible for loadings for which Level C appropriate rules of NB-6000. Valves with a primary
Limits are designated shall not exceed 120% of that pressure rating less than Class 150 shall be subjected
permitted for Level A Limits. to the required test pressure for Class 150 rated valves.
(b) The shell hydrostatic test shall be made with the
NB-3526.2 Pipe Reaction Stress. Pipe reaction
valve in the partially open position. Stem leakage during
stresses shall be computed in accordance with the
this test is permissible. End closure seals for retaining
equations of NB-3545.2(b)(1), and the allowable value
fluid at test pressure in welding end valves may be
considered individually is 1.8Sm for the valve body
positioned in the welding end transitions, as defined
material at 500°F (260°C). In performing these calcula-
in NB-3544.8(b), in reasonable proximity to the end
tions, the value of S shall be taken as 1.2 times the
plane of the valve so as to ensure safe application of
yield strength at 500°F (260°C) of the material of the
the test pressure.
connected pipe, or 36.0 ksi when the pipe material is
(c) After the shell hydrostatic test, a valve closure
not defined in the Design Specifications.
test shall also be performed with the valve in the fully
NB-3526.3 Primary Stress and Secondary Stress. closed position with a test pressure across the valve
The equation of NB-3545.2 shall be satisfied using Cp disk no less than 110% of the 100°F (38°C) pressure
equal to 1.5, Ped computed in accordance with NB- rating. For valves that are designed for Service Condi-
3526.2, and QT equal to 0, and the calculated value tions that have the pressure differential across the
shall be limited to 2.25Sm. closure member limited to values less than the 100°F
(38°C) pressure rating, and have closure members or
NB-3526.4 Secondary and Peak Stresses. The re-
actuating devices (direct, mechanical, fluid, or electri-
quirements of NB-3545 and NB-3550 need not be met.
cal), or both, that would be subject to damage at high
differential pressures, the test pressure may be reduced
NB-3527 Level D Service Limits to 110% of the maximum specified differential pressure
in the closed position. This exception shall be identified
If the Design Specifications specify any loadings for
in the Design Specification, and this maximum specified
which Level D Limits are designated, the guidelines
differential pressure shall be noted on the valve name-
of Appendix F may be used in evaluating those loadings
plate and N Certificate Holder’s Data Report Form.
independently of other loadings.
During this test, seat leakage is permitted unless a
limiting leakage value is defined by the Design Specifi-
cations. The duration of this test shall be 1 min /in.
NB-3530 GENERAL RULES
of minimum wall thickness tm with a minimum duration
NB-3531 Pressure–Temperature Ratings and of 1 min unless otherwise defined in the Design Specifi-
Hydrostatic Tests cations.
(d) For valves designed for nonisolation service,
NB-3531.1 Pressure–Temperature Ratings. A valve
whose primary function is to modulate flow, and by
designed in accordance with NB-3541 may be used in
accordance with the pressure–temperature ratings in
ANSI B16.34, Tables 2-1.1A to 2-2.7A (Standard Class) 18 Special features such as wear surfaces or seating surfaces may
for flanged end or welding end (including socket welding demand special alloys or proprietary treatments. The absence of such
materials from Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B
end) valves, and ANSI B16.34, Tables 2-1.1B to 2- shall not be construed to prohibit their use and such materials do
2.7B (Special Class) for welding end (including socket not require approval under Appendix IV (NB-2121).
113
their design are prevented from providing full closure, C1pdiscontinuity temperature gradient index,
the valve closure test defined in (c) above is not °F /in.2
required. This exception shall be identified in the Design C2pstress index for thermal secondary mem-
Specification and noted on the valve nameplate and brane stress resulting from structural discon-
the N Certificate Holder’s Data Report Form. tinuity
(e) Hydrostatic tests for metal bellows or metal C3pstress index for maximum secondary mem-
diaphragm stem sealed valves shall include hydrostatic brane plus bending stress resulting from
testing of the valve body, bonnet, body-to-bonnet joint, structural discontinuity
and either the bellows or diaphragm or the required C4pmaximum magnitude of the difference in
backup stem seal. average wall temperatures for wall thick-
(f) The inlet (primary pressure-containing) portion nesses Te1 and te (resulting from a step
of pressure relief valves shall be hydrostatically tested change in fluid temperature DTf) divided
at a pressure at least 1.5 times the set pressure marked by DTf
on the valve. For closed system application, the outlet C5pstress index for thermal fatigue stress com-
portion of the pressure relief valves shall be hydrostati- ponent resulting from through-wall tempera-
cally tested to 1.5 times the design secondary pressure ture gradient caused by step change in fluid
(NB-7111). temperature (NB-3550)
C6pEapproduct of Young’s modulus and the
NB-3531.3 Allowance for Variation From Design
coefficient of linear thermal expansion at
Loadings. Under the conditions of relief or safety valve
500°F, psi /°F (NB-3550)
operation for valves designed in accordance with NB-
C7pstress index for thermal stress resulting from
3541, the service pressure may exceed the Design
through-wall temperature gradient associ-
Pressure as defined by the pressure–temperature ratings
ated with 100°F /hr fluid temperature change
of ANSI B16.34 by no more than 10%.
rate, psi /in.
dpinside diameter used as a basis for crotch
NB-3532 Design Stress Intensity Values reinforcement [NB-3545.1(a)], in.
depinside diameter of the larger end of the
Design stress intensity values to be used in the design valve body [NB-3545.2(b)(3)], in.
of valves are given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, dmpinside diameter used as basis for determining
Tables 2A and 2B.18 body minimum wall thickness (NB-3541), in.
Fbpbending modulus of standard connected
NB-3533 Marking pipe, in.3
Gbpvalve body section bending modulus at
Each valve shall be marked as required by ANSI crotch region [NB-3545.2(b)], in.3
B16.34 and NCA-8220. Ipmoment of inertia, in.4, used in calculating
Gb [NB-3545.2(b)(5)]
Itpfatigue usage factor for step changes in
NB-3534 Nomenclature
fluid temperature
Af peffective fluid pressure area based on fully Kepstrain distribution factor used in elastic–
corroded interior contour for calculating plastic fatigue calculation (NB-3550)
crotch primary membrane stress [NB- LA, LNpeffective distances used to determine Af , Am
3545.1(a)], sq in. [NB-3545.1(a)(3)]
Ampmetal area based on fully corroded interior m, npmaterial parameters for determining Ke
contour effective in resisting fluid force (NB-3554)
acting on Af [NB-3545.1(a)], sq in. Nappermissible number of complete startup /
Capstress index for oblique bonnets [NB- shutdown cycles at 100°F /hr fluid tempera-
3545.2(a)] ture change rate (NB-3545.3)
Cbpstress index for body bending secondary Nippermissible number of step changes in fluid
stress resulting from moment in connected temperature from Figs. I-9.0
pipe [NB-3545.2(b)] Nriprequired number of fluid step temperature
Cppstress index for body primary plus secondary changes DTf i (NB-3553)
stress, inside surface, resulting from internal Pebpsecondary stress due to pipe reaction [NB-
pressure [NB-3545.2(a)] 3545.2(b)], psi
114
NB-3534 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3542
Pmpgeneral primary membrane stress intensity crotch for calculating LA and LN [Fig. NB-
at crotch region, calculated according to 3545.1(a)-1], in.
NB-3545.1(a), psi tepminimum body wall thickness adjacent to
pdpDesign Pressure, psi crotch for calculating thermal stresses [Fig.
prpPressure Rating Class Index, psi NB-3545.2(c)-1], in.
pspstandard calculation pressure from NB- tmpminimum body wall thickness as determined
3545.1, psi by NB-3541, in.
p1, p2prated pressures from tables of ANSI B16.34 t1, t2pminimum wall thicknesses from ANSI
corresponding to Pressure Rating Class Indi- B16.34 corresponding to Listed Pressure
ces pr1 and pr2, psi Rating Class Indices pr1 and pr2 and inside
Qppsum of primary plus secondary stresses at diameter dm, in.
crotch resulting from internal pressure [NB- DPf ipfull range of pressure fluctuation associated
3545.2(a)], psi with DTf i, psi
QT1pmaximum thermal stress component caused DPipspecified range of pressure fluctuation asso-
by through-wall temperature gradient associ- ciated with DTi , psi
ated with 100°F /hr fluid temperature change DTf ipa specified step change in fluid temperature,
rate [NB-3545.2(c)], psi °F, where ip1, 2, 3, . . ., n; used to
QT3pmaximum thermal secondary membrane plus determine the fatigue acceptability of a valve
bending stress resulting from structural dis- body (NB-3554)
continuity and 100°F /hr fluid temperature DTipspecified range of fluid temperature, °F,
change rate, psi where i p 1, 2, 3, . . ., n; used to evaluate
rpmean radius of body wall at crotch region normal valve usage (NB-3553)
[Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-1], in. DT′pmaximum magnitude of the difference in
ripinside radius of body at crotch region for average wall temperatures for walls of thick-
calculating Qp [NB-3545.2(a)], in. nesses te and Te, resulting from 100°F /hr
r2pfillet radius of external surface at crotch fluid temperature change rate, °F
[NB-3545.1(a)], in.
Spassumed maximum stress in connected pipe
for calculating the secondary stress due to NB-3540 DESIGN OF PRESSURE-
pipe reaction [NB-3545.2(b)], psi RETAINING PARTS
Sipfatigue stress intensity range at crotch region NB-3541 General Requirements for Body Wall
resulting from step change in fluid tempera- Thickness
ture DTf i and pressure DPf i (NB-3550), psi
Smpdesign stress intensity (NB-3532), psi The minimum wall thickness of a valve body is to
be determined by the rules of NB-3542 or NB-3543.
Snpsum of primary plus secondary stress intensi-
ties at crotch region resulting from 100°F /hr
temperature change rate (NB-3545.2), psi NB-3542 Minimum Wall Thickness of Listed
Sn(max)pmaximum range of sum of primary plus Pressure Rated Valves19
secondary stress, psi
The wall thickness requirements for listed pressure
Sp1pfatigue stress intensity at inside surface in
rated valves apply also to integral body venturi valves.
crotch region resulting from 100°F /hr fluid
For a valve designed to a listed pressure rating of
temperature change rate (NB-3545.3), psi
ANSI B16.34, the minimum thickness of its body wall,
Sp2pfatigue stress intensity at outside surface in
including the neck, is to be determined from ANSI
crotch region resulting from 100°F /hr fluid
B16.34, except that the inside diameter dm shall be the
temperature change rate (NB-3545.3), psi
larger of the basic valve body inside diameters in the
Tbpthickness of valve wall adjacent to crotch region near the welding ends. Highly localized variations
region for calculating LA and LN [Fig. NB- of inside diameter associated with weld preparation
3545.1(a)-1], in.
Tepmaximum effective metal thickness in crotch
19 A listed pressure rated valve is one listed in the tables of ANSI
region for calculating thermal stresses [Fig.
B16.34. A nonlisted pressure rated valve is one whose Design
NB-3545.2(c)-1], in. Pressure and Temperature do not specifically appear in those tables
Trpthickness of body (run) wall adjacent to (NB-3543).
115
[NB-3544.8(a) and (b)] need not be considered for provided with fillets of radius r2 ≥ 0.3tm. Figure NB-
establishing minimum wall thickness tm. In all such 3544.1(a)-1 illustrates such fillets.
cases, however, the requirements of NB-3545.2(b)(6) (b) Corner radii on internal surfaces with r4 < r2
shall be satisfied. are permissible.
(c) Sharp fillets shall be avoided. When sharp discon-
tinuities are convenient for ring grooves and similar
NB-3543 Minimum Wall Thickness of Valves configuration details, they shall be isolated from the
of Nonlisted Pressure Rating19 major body primary and secondary stresses or modified
as illustrated by Fig. NB-3544.1(c)-1.
To design a valve for Design Pressure and Design
Temperature corresponding to other than one of the NB-3544.2 Penetrations of Pressure-Retaining
pressure ratings listed in the tables of ANSI B16.34, Boundary. Penetrations of the pressure-retaining bound-
the procedure is the same as that of NB-3542 except ary, other than the neck intersection, such as holes
that interpolation is required as follows. required for check valve shafts and drain or sensing
(a) Based on the Design Temperature, linear interpola- lines, shall be located to minimize the compounding
tion between the tabulated temperature intervals shall be of normal body stresses.
used to determine the listed pressure rating p1, next below,
and p2, next above, the Design Pressure pd corresponding NB-3544.3 Attachments. Attachments, such as lugs
to listed Pressure Rating Class Indices,20 pr1 and pr2, re- and similar protuberances, on the pressure-retaining
spectively. boundary shall be tapered to minimize discontinuity
(b) Determine the minimum wall thickness tm corres- stresses (Fig. NB-3544.3-1). Reentrant angles shall be
ponding to Design Loadings by: avoided. Attachments shall meet the requirements of
NB-3135.
1p 2
p d − p1 NB-3544.4 Body Internal Contours. Body internal
tm p t 1 + × (t2 − t1 )
2 − p1 contours in sections normal to the run or neck center
lines shall be generally smooth in curvature, or so
(c) Determine the interpolated Pressure Rating Class proportioned that the removal of unavoidable discontinu-
Index pr , corresponding to Design Loadings, by: ities, such as the valve seat, will leave generally smooth
curvature.
1p 2
pd − p 1 NB-3544.5 Out-of-Roundness. Out-of-roundness in
pr p p r + × ( pr −pr )
1
2 − p1
2 1 excess of 5% for sections of essentially uniform thick-
ness shall be such that:
1 2 1 2
b 3 3b2 − 2ab − a 2 S
+ + 1 ≤ 1.5 m
NB-3544 Body Shape Rules tb 4 tb2 ps
The rules of this paragraph constitute minimum re-

quirements intended to limit the fatigue strength reduc-
where
tion factor, associated with local structural discontinu-
2ap minor inside diameter, in.
ities in critical regions, to 2.0 or less. When smaller
2bp major inside diameter, in.
values of the fatigue strength reduction factor can be
tbp thickness, in.
justified, it is permissible to use them.
The ovality criterion can be satisfied by increasing the
NB-3544.1 Fillets for External and Internal Inter- thickness locally, provided that the thickness variation
sections and Surfaces is smoothly distributed. Out-of-roundness in excess of
(a) Intersections of the surfaces of the pressure re- this limitation must be compensated for by providing
taining boundary at the neck to body junction shall be reinforcement.
20 For
NB-3544.6 Doubly Curved Sections. Sections
all listed pressure ratings except Class 150, the Pressure Rating
Class Index is the same as the pressure rating class designation. For curved longitudinally with radius rLong, as well as
Class 150 use 115 psi for the Pressure Rating Class Index. laterally with radius rLat, must be such that:
116
Fig. NB-3544.1(a)-1 NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3544.1(c)-1
FIG. NB-3544.1(a)-1 FILLETS AND CORNERS
FIG. NB-3544.1(c)-1 RING GROOVES
117
FIG. NB-3544.3-1 LUGS AND PROTUBERANCES
1 1 4 otherwise stated in the Design Specifications, with ANSI

+ ≥
rLong rLat 3dm B16.34.
(b) Valve body transitions leading to valve weld
where dm is the diameter used to establish the local ends shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.34.
wall thickness by NB-3541. (c) Flanged ends shall be in accordance with ANSI
B16.34.
NB-3544.7 Flat Sections. Flat sections shall be suffi-
(d) Alignment tolerances given in Fig. NB-4233(a)-1
ciently limited in extent so that arcuate sections having
shall apply to all auxiliary piping, such as drain lines,
the same radius–thickness ratio as required by NB-
which begin or terminate at the valve.
3542 may be inscribed (Fig. NB-3544.7-1). The in-
(e) For socket welding ends, valves of nominal size
scribed section may be less thick than the minimum
thickness required by NB-3542, provided that its radius 2 in. (DN 50) and smaller for which the body cavity
is proportionally smaller than the value used to deter- consists of cylindrically bored sections shall meet all
mine the minimum required thickness. The method of of the following:
NB-3544.6 above may be used to show additive support, (1) dm shall be the port drill diameter;
but the denominator of the right side term must be (2) the requirements of NB-3542 shall be satis-
reduced in the ratio of the thickness of the inscribed fied; and
arcuate section to the minimum required thickness (NB- (3) socket welding end valves of nominal size
3542). If adequacy cannot be shown by the above greater than 2 in. (DN 50) shall not be used.
rules, it is necessary to determine the stresses in the
flat region experimentally to demonstrate adequacy for
pressure induced stresses only, with internal pressure NB-3544.9 Openings for Auxiliary Connections.
equal to the standard calculation pressure ps. Openings for auxiliary connections, such as for drains,
NB-3544.8 Body End Dimensions bypasses, and vents, shall meet the requirements of
(a) Valve body contours at valve weld ends shall ANSI B16.34 and the applicable reinforcement require-
be in accordance with Fig. NB-4250-1, and, unless ments of NB-3330.
118
NB-3545 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3545.1
FIG. NB-3544.7-1 FLAT WALL LIMITATION
NB-3545 Body Primary and Secondary Stress method in accordance with the rules of (1) through
Limits (6) below using Fig. NB-3545.1(a)-1.
(1) From an accurately drawn layout of the valve
The limits of primary and secondary stresses are
body, depicting the finished section of the crotch region
established in the following subparagraphs.
in the mutual plane of the bonnet and flow passage
center lines, determine the fluid area Af and metal area
Am. Af and Am are to be based on the internal surface
NB-3545.1 Primary Membrane Stress Due to Inter- after complete loss of metal assigned to corrosion
nal Pressure. For valves meeting all requirements of allowance.
this Subarticle, the most highly stressed portion of the (2) Calculate the crotch general primary membrane
body under internal pressure is at the neck to flow stress intensity:
passage junction and is characterized by circumferential
tension normal to the plane of center lines, with the
maximum value at the inside surface. The rules of this
1A 2
Af
Pm p + 0.5 ps
paragraph are intended to control the general primary m
membrane stress in this crotch region. The Standard
Calculation Pressure ps to be used for satisfying the
requirements of NB-3545 is found either directly or The allowable value of this stress intensity is Sm for
by interpolation from the tables in ANSI B16.34 as the valve body material at 500°F (260°C) as given in
the pressure at 500°F (260°C) for the given Pressure Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B.
Rating Class Index pr . (3) The distances LA and LN which provide bounds
(a) In the crotch region, the maximum primary mem- on the fluid and metal areas are determined as follows.
brane stress is to be determined by the pressure area Use the larger value of:
119
Fig. NB-3545.1(a)-1 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB
FIG. NB-3545.1(a)-1 PRESSURE AREA METHOD
120
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3545.1(a)-1
FIG. NB-3545.1(a)-1 PRESSURE AREA METHOD (CONT’D)
121
LA p 0.5d − Tb normal valve types with typical wall proportioning, the

designer is cautioned to review unusual body configura-
tions for possible higher stress regions. Suspected re-
or
gions are to be checked by the pressure area method
applied to the particular local body contours. The
LA p T r allowable value of this stress intensity is Sm for the
valve body material at 500°F (260°C) as given in
and use Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B.
NB-3545.2 Secondary Stresses. In addition to satis-

LN p 0.5r2 + 0.354 √ Tb (d + Tb )
fying the criteria of NB-3541 through NB-3545.1, a
valve body shall also satisfy the criterion that the range
where the dimensions are as shown in Fig. NB- of primary plus secondary stresses Sn due to internal
3545.1(a)-1. pressure, pipe reaction, and thermal effects shall not
In establishing appropriate values for the above pa- exceed 3Sm for the body material at 500°F (260°C),
rameters, some judgment may be required if the valve where Qp, Peb, and QT3 are determined by the rules
body is irregular as it is for globe valves and others of this paragraph. That is:
with nonsymmetric shapes. In such cases, the internal
boundaries of Af shall be the lines that trace the greatest
width of internal wetted surfaces perpendicular to the Sn p Qp + Peb + 2 QT ≤ 3 Sm
3
plane of the stem and pipe ends [Fig. NB-3545.1(a)-
1 sketches (b), (d), and (e)].
(4) If the calculated boundaries for Af and Am, as (a)(1) The body primary plus secondary stress Qp
defined by LA and LN, fall beyond the valve body [Fig. due to internal pressure is to be determined by:
NB-3545.1(a)-1 sketch (b)], the body surface becomes
the proper boundary for establishing Af and Am. No
1t 2
ri
credit is to be taken for any area of connected piping Qp p C p + 0.5 ps
e
which may be included within the limits of LA and
LN. If the flange is included with Am, the area of one
bolt hole is to be subtracted for determining the net
value of Am. where the primary plus secondary pressure stress index
(5) Except as modified below, web or fin-like Cp is equal to 3 and
extensions of the valve body are to be credited to Am psp Standard Calculation Pressure defined by NB-
only to an effective length from the wall equal to the 3545.1, psi
average thickness of the credited portion. The remaining rip radius of a circle which circumscribes the inside
web area is to be added to Af [Fig. NB-3545.1(a)-1 wall contour in the crotch region, in.
sketch (b)]. However, to the extent that additional area tep an effective wall thickness at that location, in.
will pass the following test, it may also be included (typically te p Tr) [Fig. NB-3545.1(a)-1]
in Am. A line perpendicular to the plane of the stem In choosing an appropriate value for te, credit may be
and pipe ends from any points in Am does not break taken for general reinforcement material at the critical
out of the wetted surface but passes through a continuum section but not for local fillets. Protuberances or ribs
of metal until it breaks through the outer surface of are not to be considered in determining ri and te.
the body. Guidance is provided by Fig. NB-3545.2(a)-1 in which
(6) In most cases, it is expected that the portions the illustrations correspond to the critical sections of
defined by Am in the several illustrations of Fig. NB- the valve bodies of Fig. NB-3545.1(a)-1. The parameters
3545.1(a)-1 will be most highly stressed. However, in ri and te are intended to be representative of a tee,
the case of highly irregular valve bodies, it is recom- reinforced or unreinforced, with the general configura-
mended that all sections of the crotch be checked to tion of the valve body for which minor shape details
ensure that the largest value of Pm has been established associated with the valve function are ignored.
considering both open and fully closed conditions. (2) For valve bodies with bonnet center lines other
(b) In regions other than the crotch, while the value than perpendicular to the flow passage, the body stress
of Pm calculated by NB-3545.1(a) will be the highest Qp due to internal pressure defined above must be
value of body general primary membrane stress for all multiplied by the factor Ca:
122
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3545.2(a)-1
FIG. NB-3545.2(a)-1 CRITICAL SECTIONS OF VALVE BODIES
123
0.8 maximum bending stress at the corner of the crotch.

Ca p 0.2 +
sin a The fiber stress at the outside surface is to be considered
as governing in calculating Gb.
where (6) When valves are to be applied in a venturi
ap acute angle between the bonnet and flow pas- arrangement such that the connected pipe may be larger
sage center lines, deg. than that corresponding to the nominal size of the
(b) The secondary stress due to pipe reaction shall valve, it is necessary to base Peb on the actual larger
meet the criteria of (1) through (6) below to ensure connected pipe. Such cases must be treated individually
the adequacy of the valve body for safely transmitting to ensure compliance with the secondary and fatigue
forces and moments imposed by the connected piping stress criteria of this Subarticle. When the venturi
system. arrangement is not fabricated by the N Certificate
(1) Based on the critical section A–A at the crotch, Holder, the Design Specifications shall include sufficient
as illustrated by Fig. NB-3545.2(a)-1, calculate the information to permit the N Certificate Holder to make
value of Peb where this check.
(Bending load effect) (c) Thermal secondary stresses in the valve crotch
region, resulting from through-wall temperature gradient
Cb F b S and thickness variation (average temperature difference),
Peb p are to be calculated on the basis of a continuous ramp
Gb
change in fluid temperature at 100°F /hr (56°C/hr) using
the model of Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-1 sketch (a). Figure
NB-3545.2(c)-1 sketch (b) illustrates how r, Te1, Te2,
The allowable value of Peb is 1.5Sm for the valve body
and te are to be determined for the typically irregular
material at 500°F (260°C). Determination of S, Fb, Cb,
crotch shape of valves. The thermal secondary stress
and Gb required to calculate Peb is to be in accordance
components are to be determined in accordance with
with the requirements of (2) through (5) below.
the following:
(2) When the valve designer knows the material
(1) Stress component QT1 which is the result of
of the connected pipe, S may be calculated as the yield
a through-wall temperature gradient is defined as:
strength for the pipe material at 500°F (260°C). When
the designer does not know the piping material or is
QT p C7 (Te )2
designing a valve independently of a particular applica- 1 1
tion, the value of S shall be taken as 30.0 ksi (207 MPa).
(3) Calculate Fb where where
C7p 110 psi /in.2 for ferritic steels, or
0.393 de3 ps C7p 380 psi /in.2 for austenitic steels
Fb p
20,000 − ps Te1 is illustrated in Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-1.
(2) Stress component QT3 which is the membrane
but not less than: plus bending stress as a result of wall thickness variation
(a) the section modulus of Schedule 40 pipe is defined as:
with the next larger inside diameter than de for de
<10.02 in. QT p C6 C3 DT ′
3
(b) 0.295 d e2 for de >10.02 in.
where de equals the inside diameter of the larger end where C3 is found from Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-4 and
of the valve body.
(4) Calculate the factor Cb: DT ′ p C1 (T 2e1 – t 2e )
2⁄
3
Cb p 0.335
r
te 12 where
C1p .53 °F /in.2 for ferritic steels, or
C1p 1.4 °F /in.2 for austenitic steels
When the results are less than 1.0, use Cb p 1.0.
te is illustrated in Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-1.
(5) The factor Gb is the section modulus I /(ri +
te), in.3, for bending at the plane through A–A about NB-3545.3 Fatigue Requirements. The fatigue anal-
the axis perpendicular to the mutual plane of bonnet ysis requirements are satisfied provided the rules of
and body center lines, such as that axis which produces this subparagraph and the rules of NB-3550 are met.
124
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-1
FIG. NB-3545.2(c)-1 MODEL FOR DETERMINING SECONDARY STRESS IN VALVE CROTCH REGION
125
Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-3 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB
FIG. NB-3545.2(c)-3 THERMAL STRESS INDEX VERSUS THICKNESS CONTINUITY RUN OR BRANCH
126
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-4
FIG. NB-3545.2(c)-4 SECONDARY STRESS INDEX VERSUS THICKNESS DISCONTINUITY RUN OR BRANCH
127
Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-5 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB Fig. NB-3545.2(c)-6
FIG. NB-3545.2(c)-5 C4 VERSUS Te 1 / te
FIG. NB-3545.2(c)-6 STRESS INDEX FOR THERMAL FATIGUE
128
NB-3545.3 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3551
The calculated allowable number of cycles is Na ≥ NB-3546.3 Other Valve Parts

2000 cycles, where Na is determined from Figs. I-9.0 (a) Valve stems, stem retaining structures, and other
by entering the appropriate curve with Sa, with Sa significantly stressed valve parts whose failure can lead
defined as the larger value of Sp1 and Sp2 defined as to gross violation of the pressure-retaining boundary
follows: shall be designed so that their primary stresses, based
on pressure equal to the 100°F (38°C) pressure rating
and conservatively estimated or calculated additional
2 P loadings, where applicable, do not exceed Sm as tabu-
Sp p Qp + eb + QT + 1.3 QT
1 3 2 3 1
lated in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and
2B, or for materials not listed in these Tables, do
not exceed two-thirds of the minimum specified yield
K
Sp p0.4Qp + (Peb + 2QT ) strength or one-fourth of the minimum specified tensile
2 2 3
strength, whichever is lower.
(b) Bypass piping shall be designed in accordance
The values of Sp1 and Sp2 are based on the values for with the requirements of NB-3600. Unless otherwise
Qp, Peb, QT1, and QT3 found in accordance with the stated in the valve Design Specifications, bypass piping
rules of NB-3545.2. K is the fatigue strength reduction design shall be the responsibility of the piping system
factor associated with the external fillet at the crotch designer.
and is to be considered as 2.0 unless the designer can (c) Valve designs, requiring solenoid plunger core
justify use of a smaller value. tubes or electromagnetic position indicator core tubes,
may substitute the rules of NB-3641.1 for the require-
ments of NB-3541, NB-3542, or NB-3543 for minimum
NB-3546 Design Requirements for Valve Parts wall thickness of the extension, provided that detailed
Other Than Bodies calculations are prepared in accordance with NB-3200
NB-3546.1 Body-to-Bonnet Joints at the 100°F (38°C) valve pressure rating conditions,
(a) Bolted body-to-bonnet joints shall be designed and covering all discontinuities in the core tube, includ-
in accordance with the pressure design rules of XI- ing the cap end and attachment end, and all welds,
3000, including the use of the appropriate allowable including any dissimilar metal welds. These calculations
stress given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables shall be included in the Design Report (NB-3560). The
1A and 1B, or by the procedures of NB-3200, except calculations shall include the design loadings given in
fatigue analysis of bolts is not required. NB-3546.1(b)(1) through NB-3546.1(b)(4) along with
(b) Body-to-bonnet joints other than bolted connec- any additional requirements given in the Design Speci-
tions including joints of special or patented types for fications.
which specific standards do not exist may be used NB-3546.4 Fatigue Evaluation. When the Design
provided that the N Certificate Holder shall use methods Specifications include such service loadings that the
of design and construction that will be as safe as valve is not exempted from fatigue analysis by the
otherwise required by the rules of this Subarticle for rules of NB-3222.4(d), it is recommended that consider-
the following design conditions: ation be given to the cyclic stress duty of the portions
(1) Design Pressure equal to Standard Calculation considered by NB-3546.
Pressure ps (NB-3545.1);
(2) calculation temperature of 500°F (260°C);
(3) thermal stresses based on most severe condi-
tions resulting from continuous fluid temperature ramp
increase or decrease at 100°F /hr (56°C/hr); NB-3550 CYCLIC LOADING
(4) fatigue life at least 2000 cycles of startup / REQUIREMENTS
shutdown based on the above conditions with simultane- NB-3551 Verification of Adequacy for Cyclic
ous increase or decrease of pressure and temperature. Conditions
NB-3546.2 Valve Disk. The valve disk shall be The adequacy of a valve for cyclic loading shall be
considered a part of the pressure-retaining boundary. verified in accordance with this Subsubarticle. Noninte-
The primary membrane stress intensity shall not exceed gral seat rings attached to the valve body by partial
Sm, and the primary bending stress intensity shall not penetration or fillet welds (NB-4433) are exempt from
exceed 1.5Sm. the fatigue analysis requirements of NB-3123.2, pro-
129
vided the seat rings are shouldered against the valve (c) Pressure fluctuations not excluded by NB-3552
body; see Fig. NB-3544.1(c)-1. are to be included in the cyclic load calculations. The
full range of pressure fluctuation from the normal
condition to the condition under consideration shall be
NB-3552 Excluded Cycles represented by Dpi in NB-3554.
In satisfying the cyclic loading requirements, the
following variations need not be considered:
NB-3554 Cyclic Stress Calculations
(a) pressure variations less than pd /3 for carbon and
low alloy steels and less than pd /2 for austenitic stainless A valve conforming to NB-3512.1 shall be qualified
steels; by the procedure of (a) through (d) below.
(b) temperature variations less than 30°F (17°C); (a) The following criterion shall be met by the
(c) accident or maloperation cycles expected to occur greatest temperature range:
less than five times (total) during the expected valve life;
(d) startup, shutdown cycles with temperature change Qp [Dpf (max) / ps ] + C6 C2 C4 DTf (max) <3Sm
rates of 100°F /hr (56°C/hr) or less, not in excess
of 2000.
where DTf (max) is the largest lumped temperature range
obtained using the methods of NB-3553(b), and Dpf (max)
NB-3553 Fatigue Usage is the largest range of pressure fluctuation associated
with DTf (max).
The application of a valve conforming to NB-3512.1 (b) Calculate:
is acceptable for cyclic loading conditions provided its
fatigue usage It is not greater than 1.0 as evaluated in
Sn(max) p Qp [Dpf (max) / ps ]+C6 C3 C4 DTf (max)
(a), (b), and (c) below.
(a) Consider fluid temperature changes not excluded
by NB-3552 to occur instantaneously. Provided that Provided that Sn(max) ≤ 3Sm, calculate the fatigue stresses
these changes occur in one direction and recovery is for each cyclic loading condition as follows:
at temperature change rates not in excess of 100°F /hr
(56°C/hr), the fatigue usage factor may be found by: Si p 4⁄3 Qp (Dpfi / ps ) + C6 (C3 C4+C5 ) DTfi
Nri
It p o Ni
Determine the allowable number of cycles Ni for each
loading condition by entering Figs. I-9.1 and I-9.2 with
Si /2, and determine the fatigue usage by NB-3553(a).
where Nri is the required or estimated number of fluid (c) If Sn(max) is greater than 3Sm but less than 3mSm,
temperature step changes DTf i and Ni is found from the value of Si /2 to be used for entering the design
Figs. I-9.1 and I-9.2. fatigue curve is to be found by multiplying Si by Ke ,
(b) If both heating and cooling effects are expected where:
at change rates exceeding 100°F /hr (56°C/hr), the num-
ber of cycles are to be associated by temperature ranges
1 2
(1 − n) Sn
Ke p 1.0 + −1
DTi. For example, assuming the following variations n(m − 1) 3Sm
are specified:
and where the values of the material parameters m and
20 variations: DT1 p 250 heating n are as given in Table NB-3228.5(b)-1.
10 variations: DT2 p 150 cooling (d) If Sn(max) is greater than 3mSm , use Ke p 1 /n.
100 variations: DT3 p 100 cooling
lump the ranges of variation so as to produce the NB-3560 DESIGN REPORTS

greatest effects as follows:
NB-3561 General Requirements
10 cycles DTf 1 p 250 + 150 p 400 The certified Design Reports listed in this paragraph
10 cycles DTf 2 p 250 + 100 p 350 meet the requirements of NCA-3550 for the Design
90 cycles DTf 3 p 100 Report.
130
NB-3562 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3592.2
NB-3562 Design Report for Valves Larger characteristically have multipressure zones within the
Than 4 in. Nominal Pipe Size (DN valve, that is, a primary pressure zone and a secondary
100) pressure zone as illustrated by Figs. NB-3591.1-1 and
NB-3591.1-2.
A Design Report shall be prepared in sufficient detail
to show that the valve satisfies the requirements of NB-3591.3 Acceptability of Small Liquid Relief
NB-3512. For a valve designed in accordance with Valves. Liquid pressure relief valves meeting the re-
NB-3512.1, the Design Report shall show that the quirements of NB-7000 and having an inlet piping
applicable requirements of NB-3530, NB-3541 through connection 2 in. nominal pipe size (DN 50) and under
NB-3546.2, and NB-3550 have been met. It is not shall comply with the minimum wall thickness require-
necessary to write a special Design Report based on ments of NB-3542 or NB-3543 for the applicable
specified Design Pressure and Design Temperature when pressure zone. Flange end ratings of NB-3531.1 shall
they are within the pressure–temperature rating and be used regardless of end connection. The applicable
when supplementary information or calculations are design requirements of this Subsubarticle covering the
also provided, as necessary, to complete the report for nozzle, disk, and bonnet shall apply. The analyses of
a specific application, such as the thermal cyclic duty NB-3544, NB-3545, and NB-3550 do not apply.
evaluation of NB-3550. A report submitted demonstra-
ting a design for loadings more severe than the specified NB-3591.4 Acceptability of Safety and Safety Relief
loadings is also acceptable. Valves. The design shall be such that the requirements
of this Subsubarticle are met.
NB-3563 Design Report Requirements for 4 in.
and Smaller Nominal Pipe Size (≤ DN
100) Valves NB-3592 Design Considerations
For valves whose inlet piping connection is nominally NB-3592.1 Design Conditions. The general design
4 in. (DN 100) or smaller, the Design Report shall requirements of NB-3100 are applicable, with consider-
include details to show that the requirements of NB- ation for the design conditions of the primary and
3513 have been met. secondary pressure zones. The design pressure of the
Design Specification shall be used for the applicable
zones.
NB-3590 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE In case of conflict between NB-3100 and NB-3590,
DESIGN the requirements of NB-3590 shall apply. Mechanical
loads for both the closed and the open (full discharge)
NB-3591 Acceptability positions shall be considered in conjunction with the
NB-3591.1 General. The rules of this Subsubarticle service conditions. In addition, the requirements of NB-
constitute the requirements for the design acceptability 7000 shall be met.
of spring-loaded pressure relief valves. The design rules
NB-3592.2 Stress Limits for Specified Service
for pilot operated and power actuated pressure relief
Loadings
valves are covered by NB-3500. The rules of this
(a) Stress limits for Level A and B Service Loadings
Subsubarticle cover the pressure-retaining integrity of
shall be as follows:
the valve inlet and outlet connections, nozzle, disk,
(1) the primary membrane stress intensity shall
body structure, bonnet (yoke), and body-to-bonnet
not exceed Sm;
(yoke) bolting. The rules of this Subsubarticle also
(2) the primary membrane stress intensity plus
cover other items such as the spring, spindle (stem),
primary bending stress intensity shall not exceed 1.5Sm;
spring washers, and set pressure adjusting screw. The
(3) substantiation by analysis of localized stresses
rules of this Subsubarticle do not apply to guides,
associated with contact loading of bearing or seating
control ring, bearings, set screws, and other nonpressure-
surfaces is not required;
retaining items. Figures NB-3591.1-1 and NB-3591.1-
(4) the values of Sm shall be in accordance with
2 are illustrations of typical pressure relief valves.
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A, 2B, and 4.
NB-3591.2 Definitions. The definitions for pressure (b) Stress limits for Level C Service Loadings shall
relief valve terms used in this Subsubarticle are given be as follows:
in ANSI B95.1, Terminology for Pressure Relief De- (1) the primary membrane stress intensity shall
vices, and also in NB-7000. Pressure relief valves not exceed 1.5Sm;
131
Fig. NB-3591.1-1 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB
FIG. NB-3591.1-1 TYPICAL PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES
132
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3591.1-2
FIG. NB-3591.1-2 TYPICAL PRESSURE RELIEF AND SAFETY RELIEF DEVICES
133
(2) the primary membrane stress intensity plus ratings of NB-3531.1 and shall meet the interface
primary bending stress intensity shall not exceed 1.8Sm dimensions of ANSI B16.5.
(NB-3526.2);
(3) the rules of NB-3526.3 must be satisfied. NB-3594.2 Bonnet (Yoke). The bonnet (yoke) may
(c) Stress limits for Level D Service Loadings shall be analyzed using classic bending and direct stress
be as follows: formulae, with appropriate free body diagrams. The
(1) the guidelines of Appendix F may be used in general primary membrane stress intensity and the
evaluating these conditions. general primary membrane plus primary bending stress
(d) These requirements for the acceptability of valve intensity shall be determined and shall not exceed the
design are not intended to ensure the functional ade- stress limits of NB-3592.2.
quacy of the valve. However, the Designer is cautioned NB-3594.3 Nozzle. The nozzle shall be analyzed in
that the requirements of NB-7000 relative to set pres- accordance with the applicable rules of NB-3540 and
sure, lift, blowdown, and closure shall be met. NB-3550, with a basic analytical model configuration
NB-3592.3 Earthquake. The rules of this Subsubar- as shown in Fig. NB-3594.3-1. The sections of the
ticle consider that under earthquake loadings the piping nozzle where dimensions are limited by the flow capac-
system or vessel nozzle, rather than the valve body, ity and the operational control requirements may be
will be limiting. Pressure relief valves have extended considered as simple cylindrical sections. The minimum
structures and these structures are essential to main- wall thickness of these sections shall be determined in
taining pressure integrity. An analysis, when required accordance with NB-3324.1. These requirements are
by the Design Specification, shall be performed based not applicable to the transition region to the seat
on static forces resulting from equivalent earthquake contacting area of the nozzle, defined by L in Fig.
acceleration acting at the centers of gravity of the NB-3594.3-1, provided dimension L is less than the
extended masses. Classical bending and direct stress nominal wall thickness t1.
equations, where free body diagrams determine a simple NB-3594.4 Body-to-Bonnet Joint. The body-to-bon-
stress distribution that is in equilibrium with the applied net joint shall be analyzed in accordance with NB-
loads, may be used. 3546.1.
NB-3594.5 Disk. The valve disk shall satisfy the
NB-3593 Special Design Rules requirements of NB-3546.2.
NB-3593.1 Hydrostatic Test. Hydrostatic testing NB-3594.6 Spring Washer. The average shear stress
shall be performed in accordance with NB-3531.2(f). shall not exceed 0.6Sm. The primary bending stress
intensity shall not exceed the stress limits of NB-
NB-3593.2 Marking. In addition to the marking
3592.2.
required by NCA-8220 and NB-7000, the secondary
Design Pressure shall be marked on the valve or valve NB-3594.7 Spindle (Stem). The general primary
nameplate. membrane stress intensity shall not exceed the stress
limits of NB-3592.2.
NB-3594 Design of Pressure Relief Valve Parts NB-3594.8 Adjusting Screw. The adjusting screw
shall be analyzed for thread shear stress in accordance
NB-3594.1 Body. The valve body shall be analyzed with the method of ANSI B1.1 and this stress shall
with consideration for the specific configuration of the not exceed 0.6Sm. The general primary membrane stress
body and the applicable pressure zone and loadings. intensity of the adjusting screw shall not exceed the
The design shall take into consideration the adequacy stress limits of NB-3592.2, based on the root diameter
of the inlet flange connection, the outer flange connec- of the thread.
tion, and the body structural configuration. In valve
designs where the outlet flange is an extension of the NB-3594.9 Spring. The valve spring shall be de-
bonnet, the bonnet design shall conform to all rules signed so that the full lift spring compression shall be
of body design. The body shall be designed in accord- no greater than 80% of the nominal solid deflection.
ance with the rules of NB-3540 through NB-3550. The The permanent set of the spring (defined as the differ-
design adequacy of the inlet and outlet flanges shall ence between the free height and height measured a
be determined using the rules of NB-3658. Flanges minimum of 10 min after the spring has been com-
shall conform to the applicable pressure–temperature pressed solid three additional times after presetting at
134
NB-3594.9 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3611.1
FIG. NB-3594.3-1 VALVE NOZZLE 98
room temperature) shall not exceed 0.5% of the free NB-3600 PIPING DESIGN
height.
NB-3610 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NB-3611 Acceptability
The requirements for acceptability of a piping system
are given in the following subparagraphs.
NB-3595 Design Report
NB-3595.1 General Requirements. A Design Report
shall be prepared in sufficient detail to show that NB-3611.1 Stress Limits. The design shall be such
the valve satisfies the rules of this Subsubarticle and that the stresses will not exceed the limits described
NCA-3550. in NB-3630 except as provided in NB-3611.2.
135
NB-3611.2 Acceptability When Stresses Exceed NB-3612.4 Considerations for Local Conditions
Stress Limits. When the stresses as determined by the and Transients
methods given in NB-3630 exceed the limits thereof, (a) When piping systems operating at different pres-
the design can be accepted, provided it meets the sures are connected by a valve or valves, the valve or
requirements of NB-3200. The rules of NB-3630 meet valves shall be designed for the higher pressure system
all the requirements of NB-3200. requirements of pressure and temperature. The lower
pressure system shall be designed in accordance with
NB-3611.3 Conformance to NB-3600. In cases of (1), (2), or (3) below.
conflict between NB-3100 and NB-3600, the require- (1) The requirements of the pressure system shall
ments of NB-3600 shall apply. be met.
(2) Pressure relief devices or safety valves shall
NB-3611.4 Dimensional Standards. For the applica- be included to protect the lower pressure system in
ble year of issue of all dimensional standards referred accordance with NB-7311.
to in NB-3600, see Table NB-3132-1. (3) Ensure compliance with all the conditions of
(a) through (e) below.
NB-3611.5 Prevention of Nonductile Fracture. The (a) Redundant check or remote actuated valves
requirements for prevention of nonductile fracture as shall be used in series at the interconnection, or a
set forth in NB-3211(d) shall be met. check in series with a remote actuated valve.
(b) When mechanical or electrical controls are
provided, redundant and diverse controls shall be in-
stalled which will prevent the interconnecting valves
from opening when the pressure in the high pressure
NB-3612 Pressure–Temperature Ratings
system exceeds the Design Pressure of the lower pres-
NB-3612.1 Standard Piping Products sure system.
(a) When standard piping products are used, the (c) Means shall be provided such that operability
pressure ratings given as functions of temperature in of all components, controls, and interlocks can be
the appropriate standards listed in Table NB-3132-1 verified by test.
shall not be exceeded. In addition, the requirements of (d) Means shall be provided to ensure that the
NB-3625 shall be met. When established pressure ratings leakage rate of the interconnecting valves does not
of standard products do not extend to the upper tempera- exceed the relieving capacity of the relief devices on
ture limits for the material, the ratings between those the lower pressure system.
established and the upper temperature limit may be (e) Adequate consideration shall be given to the
determined in accordance with NB-3649. control of fluid pressure caused by heating of the fluid
(b) When the adequacy of the pressure design of a trapped between two valves.
standard product is established by burst tests as permit- The low pressure system relieving capacity may be
ted in NB-3649 (ANSI B16.9, Section 8), the manufac- determined in accordance with NB-7311, on the basis
turer of the product shall maintain a record of burst of interconnecting valve being closed but leaking at a
tests conducted to ensure adequacy of product and specified rate, when (3)(a) to (3)(e) above are met.
shall so certify. Such records shall be available to the The pressure relief devices or safety valves shall adjoin
purchaser. or be as close as possible to the interconnecting valve
and shall relieve preferably to a system where the
NB-3612.2 Piping Products Without Specific Rat- relieved effluent may be contained. The design of the
ings. If piping products are used for which methods overpressure protection system shall be based on pres-
of construction are not covered by this Subsection, sure transients that are specified in the Design Spec-
the manufacturer of the product shall use methods of ification, and all other applicable requirements of NB-
construction that will be as safe as otherwise provided 7000 shall be met.
by the rules of this Subsection. When products are (b) When pressure-reducing valves are used and one
used for which pressure–temperature ratings have not or more pressure relief devices or safety valves are
been established by the standards listed in Table NB- provided, bypass valves may be provided around the
3132-1, the products shall be designed and tested in pressure-reducing valves. The combined relieving capac-
accordance with NB-3640. The manufacturer’s recom- ity of the pressure relief devices, safety valves, and
mended pressure–temperature ratings shall not be ex- relief piping shall be such that the lower pressure
ceeded. system service pressure will not exceed the lower
136
NB-3612.4 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3622.2
pressure system Design Pressure by more than 10% if in the design. Such piping shall be designed for the
the pressure-reducing valve fails in the open position maximum pressure to which it may be subjected.
and the bypass valve is open at the same time. If (g) Pump discharge piping shall be designed for the
the pressure-reducing valve and its bypass valve are maximum pressure exerted by the pump at any load
mechanically or electrically interlocked so that only and for the highest corresponding temperature actually
one may be open at any time the high pressure system existing.
is at a pressure higher than the Design Pressure of the (h) Where a fluid passes through heat exchangers in
low pressure system, then the relieving capacity of the series, the design temperature of the piping in each
pressure relief devices, safety valves, and relief piping section of the system shall conform to the most severe
shall be at least equal to the maximum capacity of the temperature condition expected to be produced by heat
larger of the two valves. The interlocks shall be redun- exchangers in that section.
dant and diverse.
(c) Exhaust and pump suction lines for any service
and pressure shall have relief valves of a suitable size NB-3613 Allowances
unless the lines and attached equipment are designed NB-3613.1 Corrosion or Erosion. When corrosion
for the maximum pressure and temperature to which or erosion is expected, the wall thickness of the piping
they may be accidentally or otherwise subjected. shall be increased over that required by other design
(d) The effluent from relief devices may be dis- requirements. This allowance shall be consistent with
charged outside the containment only if provisions are the specified design life of the piping.
made for the disposal of the effluent.
(e) Drip lines from steam headers, mains, separators, NB-3613.2 Threading and Grooving. The calculated
or other equipment operating at different pressures shall minimum thickness of piping that is to be threaded or
not discharge through the same trap. Where several grooved shall be increased by an allowance equal to
traps discharge into a single header that is or may be the depth of the cut.
under pressure, a stop valve and a check valve shall NB-3613.3 Mechanical Strength. When necessary
be provided in the discharge line from each trap. The to prevent damage, collapse, or buckling of pipe due
Design Pressure of trap discharge piping shall not be to superimposed loads from supports or other causes,
less than the maximum discharge pressure to which it the wall thickness of the pipe shall be increased, or,
may be subjected. Trap discharge piping shall be de- if this is impractical or would cause excessive local
signed for the same pressure as the trap inlet piping stresses, the superimposed loads or other causes shall
unless the discharge piping is vented to a system be reduced or eliminated by other design methods.
operated under lower pressure and has no intervening
stop valves.
(f) Blowdown, dump, and drain piping from water NB-3620 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
spaces of a steam generation system shall be designed
for saturated steam at the pressures and temperatures NB-3621 Design and Service Loadings
given below. The provisions of NB-3110 apply.
Vessel Design Design

Pressure, Pressure, Temperature, NB-3622 Dynamic Effects
psi psi °F
NB-3622.1 Impact. Impact forces caused by either
600 and below 250 410 external or internal loads shall be considered in the
601 to 900 400 450 piping design.
901 to 1500 600 490
1501 and above 900 535 NB-3622.2 Reversing Dynamic Loads. Reversing
dynamic loads (Fig. NB-3622-1) are those loads which
These requirements for blowdown, dump, and drain cycle about a mean value and include building filtered
piping apply to the entire system beyond the blowdown loads, earthquake, and the reflected waves in a piping
valves to the blowdown tank or other points where system due to flow transients resulting from sudden
the pressure is reduced to approximately atmospheric opening or closure of valves. A reversing dynamic load
and cannot be increased by closing a valve. When shall be treated as a nonreversing dynamic load in
pressures can be increased because of calculated pres- applying the rules of NB-3600 when either of the
sure drop or otherwise, this shall be taken into account following conditions exist:
137
FIG. NB-3622-1 EXAMPLES OF REVERSING AND NONREVERSING DYNAMIC LOADS
138
NB-3622.2 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3630
(a) The frequency ratio of the dynamic dominant thermal expansion and contraction loads caused by
load driving frequency to the lowest piping system rapid temperature fluctuations.
natural frequency is less than 0.5.
(b) The number of reversing dynamic load cycles,
exclusive of earthquake, exceeds 20. NB-3625 Stress Analysis
NB-3622.3 Vibration. Piping shall be arranged and A stress analysis shall be prepared in sufficient detail
supported so that vibration will be minimized. The to show that each of the stress limitations of NB-3640
designer shall be responsible, by design and by observa- and NB-3650 is satisfied when the piping is subjected
tion under startup or initial service conditions, for to the loadings required to be considered by this
ensuring that vibration of piping systems is within Subarticle.
acceptable levels.
NB-3622.4 Nonreversing Dynamic Loads. Nonre-

versing dynamic loads (Fig. NB-3622-1) are those loads NB-3630 PIPING DESIGN AND ANALYSIS 98
which do not cycle about a mean value and include CRITERIA
the initial thrust force due to sudden opening or closure
(a) The design and analysis of piping when subjected
of valves and waterhammer resulting from entrapped
to the individual or combined effects of the loadings
water in two-phase flow systems.
defined in NB-3100 and NB-3620 may be performed
in accordance with this Subarticle. Design for pressure
loading shall be performed in accordance with the rules
NB-3623 Weight Effects of NB-3640. Standard piping products that meet the
Piping systems shall be supported to provide for the requirements of ANSI B16.9 or NB-3649 satisfy the
effects of live and dead weights, as defined in the requirements of NB-3640, and only the analysis required
following subparagraphs, and they shall be arranged by NB-3650 need be performed.
or properly restrained to prevent undue strains on (b) Within a given piping system, the stress and
equipment. fatigue analysis shall be performed in accordance with
one of the methods given in NB-3650, NB-3200, or
NB-3623.1 Live Weight. The live weight shall consist Appendix II. Stress indices are given in NB-3680 for
of the weight of the fluid being handled or of the fluid standard piping products, for some fabricated joints,
used for testing or cleaning, whichever is greater. and for some fabricated piping products. Some piping
products designed for pressure by applying the rules
NB-3623.2 Dead Weight. The dead weight shall of NB-3649 may not be listed in NB-3680. For such
consist of the weight of the piping, insulation, and products, the designer shall determine the stress indices
other loads permanently imposed upon the piping. as required in NB-3650.
(c) When a design does not satisfy the requirements
of NB-3640 and NB-3650, the more detailed alternative
NB-3624 Thermal Expansion and Contraction analysis given in NB-3200 or the experimental stress
Loads analysis of Appendix II may be used to obtain stress
values for comparison with the criteria of NB-3200.
NB-3624.1 Loadings, Displacements, and Re-
(d) The requirements of this Subarticle shall apply
straints. The design of piping systems shall take into
to all Class 1 piping except as exempted under (1) or
account the forces and moments resulting from thermal
(2) below.
expansion and contraction, equipment displacements
(1) Piping of 1 in. nominal pipe size or less which
and rotations, and the restraining effects of hangers,
has been classified as Class 1 in the Design Specification
supports, and other localized loadings.
may be designed in accordance with the design require-
NB-3624.2 Analysis of Thermal Expansion and ments of Subsection NC.
Contraction Effects. The analysis of the effects of (2) Class 1 piping may be analyzed in accordance
thermal expansion and contraction is covered in NB- with the Class 2 analysis of piping systems in Subsection
3672. NC, using the allowable Class 2 stresses and stress
limits, provided the specified service loads for which
NB-3624.3 Provision for Rapid Temperature Fluc- Level A and B Service Limits are designated meet all
tuation Effects. The Designer shall provide for unusual of the requirements stipulated in (a) through (e) below.
139
(a) Atmospheric to Service Pressure Cycle. The cent points21 does not change22 during normal service
specified number of times (including startup and shut- by more than the quantity Sa /2Ea, where Sa is the
down) that the pressure will be cycled from atmospheric value obtained from the applicable design fatigue curve
pressure to service pressure and back to atmospheric of Figs. I-9.0 for the total specified number of significant
pressure during normal service does not exceed the temperature difference fluctuations. A temperature dif-
number of cycles on the applicable fatigue curve of ference fluctuation shall be considered to be significant
Figs. I-9.0 corresponding to an Sa value of three times if its total algebraic range exceeds the quantity S /2Ea,
the Sm value for the material at service temperature. where S is defined as follows:
(b) Normal Service Pressure Fluctuation. The (1) If the total specified number of service
specified full range of pressure fluctuations during cycles is 106 cycles or less, S is the value of Sa
normal service does not exceed the quantity 1⁄3 × Design obtained from the applicable design fatigue curve for
Pressure × (Sa /Sm), where Sa is the value obtained 106 cycles.
from the applicable design fatigue curve for the total (2) If the total specified number of service
specified number of significant pressure fluctuations and cycles exceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of Sa obtained
Sm is the allowable stress intensity for the material at from the applicable design fatigue curve for the maxi-
service temperature. If the total specified number of mum number of cycles defined on the curve.
significant pressure fluctuations exceeds the maximum (e) Temperature Difference — Dissimilar Mate-
number of cycles defined on the applicable design rials. For components fabricated from materials of
fatigue curve, the Sa value corresponding to the maxi- differing moduli of elasticity or coefficients of thermal
mum number of cycles defined on the curve may be expansion, the total algebraic range of temperature
used. Significant pressure fluctuations are those for fluctuation, °F, experienced by the component during
which the total excursion exceeds the quantity: Design normal service does not exceed the magnitude
Pressure × 1⁄3 × (S /Sm), where S is defined as follows: Sa /2(E1a1–E2a2), where Sa is the value obtained from
(1) If the total specified number of service the applicable design fatigue curve for the total specified
cycles is 106 cycles or less, S is the value of Sa number of significant temperature fluctuations, E1 and
obtained from the applicable design fatigue curve for E2 are the moduli of elasticity, and a1 and a2 are
106 cycles. the values of the instantaneous coefficients of thermal
(2) If the total specified number of service expansion (Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TE
cycles exceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of Sa obtained and TM) at the mean temperature value involved for the
from the applicable design fatigue curve for the maxi- two materials of construction. A temperature fluctuation
mum number of cycles defined on the curve. shall be considered to be significant if its total excursion
(c) Temperature Difference — Startup and Shut- exceeds the quantity S /2(E1a1 − E2a2), where S is
down. The temperature difference, °F, between any two defined as follows.
adjacent points21 of the component during normal ser- (1) If the total specified number of service
vice does not exceed Sa /2Ea, where Sa is the value cycles is 106 cycles or less, S is the value of Sa
obtained from the applicable design fatigue curves for obtained from the applicable design fatigue curve for
the specified number of startup–shutdown cycles, a is 106 cycles.
the value of the instantaneous coefficient of thermal (2) If the total specified number of service
expansion and E is the modulus of elasticity at the cycles exceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of Sa obtained
mean value of the temperatures at the two points as from the applicable design fatigue curve for the maxi-
given by Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TE mum number of cycles defined on the curve. If the
and TM. two materials used have different applicable design
(d) Temperature Difference — Normal Service.9 fatigue curves, the lower value of Sa shall be used in
The temperature difference, °F, between any two adja- applying the rules of this paragraph.
NB-3640 PRESSURE DESIGN

21 Adjacent points are defined as points which are spaced less than
NB-3641 Straight Pipe
the distance 2√ Rt from each other, where R and t are the mean
radius and thickness, respectively, of the vessel, nozzle, flange, or NB-3641.1 Straight Pipe Under Internal Pressure. 98
other component in which the points are located.
The minimum thickness of a pipe wall required for
9 Normal service is defined as service, other than startup and shutdown,
resulting in specified Service Loadings for which Level A Limits,
Level B Limits, or Testing Limits are designated. 22 The algebraic range of the difference shall be used.
140
NB-3641.1 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3642.2
Design Pressure shall be determined from one of the TABLE NB-3642.1(b)-1

following equations: BEND RADIUS VERSUS THICKNESS
Minimum Thickness
PDo
tm p +A (1) Recommended
2(Sm + Py) Prior to Bending
Radius of Bends [Note (1)]
Pd +2A(Sm+Py)
tm p (2) 6 pipe diameters or greater 1.06tm
2(Sm + Py − P) 5 pipe diameters 1.08tm
4 pipe diameters 1.16tm
3 pipe diameters 1.25tm
where
Apan additional thickness to provide for mate- NOTE:
(1) tm is determined by Eq. (1) or (2) of NB-3641.1.
rial removed in threading, corrosion or ero-
sion allowance, and material required for
structural strength of the pipe during erec-
tion, as appropriate, in.
Dopoutside diameter of the pipe, in. (For design
be used instead of Pa. Pa may be rounded
calculations, the specified outside diameter
out to the next higher unit of 10.
of pipe disregarding outside tolerances shall
tpthe specified or actual wall thickness minus,
be used to obtain the value of tm.)
as appropriate, material removed in thread-
dpinside diameter, in.
ing, corrosion or erosion allowance, material
Ppinternal Design Pressure, psi
manufacturing tolerances, bending allow-
Smpmaximum allowable stress intensity for the
ance (NB-3642.1), or material to be removed
material at the Design Temperature taken
by counterboring, in.
from Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables
2A and 2B, psi NB-3641.2 Straight Pipe Under External Pressure.
tmpthe minimum required wall thickness, in. The rules of NB-3133 shall be used.
[Eq. (2) is valid only if d p Do − 2tm. If
pipe is ordered by its nominal wall thickness,
NB-3642 Curved Segments of Pipe
the manufacturer’s tolerance on wall thick-
ness must be taken into account.] NB-3642.1 Pipe Bends. The wall thickness for pipe
yp0.4 bends shall be determined in the same manner as
The allowable working pressure of pipe may be deter- determined for straight pipe in accordance with NB-
mined from the following equation: 3641, subject to the limitations given in (a), (b), and
(c) below.
2Sm t (a) The wall thickness after bending shall not be
Pa p (3)
less than the minimum wall thickness required for
Do − 2yt
straight pipe.
(b) The information in Table NB-3642.1(b)-1 is given
where
to guide the designer when ordering pipe.
Papthe calculated maximum allowable internal
(c) For the effects of ovality on stress levels, see
pressure for a straight pipe which shall at
NB-3680.
least equal the Design Pressure, psi. It may
be used for piping products with pressure NB-3642.2 Elbows. Elbows, manufactured in accord-
ratings equal to that of straight pipe (see ance with the standards listed in Table NB-3132-1 as
ANSI B16.9). For standard flanged joints, limited by NB-3612.1, shall be considered as meeting
the rated pressure shall be used instead of the requirements of NB-3640, except that the minimum
Pa. For other piping products where the thickness in the crotch region of short radius welding
pressure rating may be less than that of the elbows in accordance with ANSI B16.28 shall be 20%
pipe [for example, flanged joints designed greater than the minimum thickness required for the
to Appendix XI and reinforced branch con- straight pipe by Eq. (1) (NB-3641.1). The crotch region
nections (NB-3643), where part of the re- is defined as that portion of the elbow between f p
quired reinforcement is in the run pipe], 210 deg. and 330 deg., where f is defined in Fig.
the Design Pressure of those products shall NB-3685.2-1.
141
NB-3643 Intersections r′m p mean radius of the branch pipe, in.

p ri + 0.5T′b
NB-3643.1 General Requirements
rnp nominal radius [sketch (c) only], in.
(a) The rules contained in this paragraph meet the
p ri + 0.5T′b + 0.5y cos u
requirements of NB-3640 in the vicinity of branch
r2p transition radius between branch or extruded lip
connections.
and run pipe, in.
(b) Openings shall be circular, elliptical, or of any
Tbp nominal thickness of the reinforced branch, not
other shape that results from the intersection of a
including corrosion allowance or mill toler-
circular or elliptical cylinder with a cylindrical shape.
ance, in.
Additional restrictions affecting stress indices are given
T′bp nominal thickness of the branch pipe, not includ-
in NB-3680.
ing corrosion allowance or mill tolerance, in.
(c) Openings are not limited in size except to the
Top corroded finished thickness or extruded outlet
extent provided for in connection with the stress indices
measured at a height of r2 above the outside
listed in NB-3680.
surface of the run pipe, in.
(d) All references to dimensions apply to the finished
Trp nominal thickness of the run pipe, not including
dimensions, excluding material added for corrosion
corrosion allowance or mill tolerance, in.
allowance.
yp slope offset distance, in.
(e) Any type of opening permitted in these rules
up angle between vertical and slope, deg.
may be located in a welded joint.
(2) The following terms are as shown on Fig. NB-
(f) Where intersecting pipes are joined by welding
3643.3(a)-2.
a branch to a run pipe as shown in Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-
A1p metal area available for reinforcement, sq in.
2, the angle a between axes of the intersecting pipes
shall not be less than 60 deg. or more than 120 deg.
For angles outside this range, use fittings as specified
dp diameter in the given plane of the finished open-
in NB-3643.2(a) or (b).
ing in its corroded condition, in.
NB-3643.2 Branch Connections. Branch connections LAp half-width of reinforcement zone measured
in piping may be made by using one of the products along the midsurface of the run pipe, in.
or methods set forth in (a) through (c) below. L′Ap half-width of zone in which two-thirds of com-
(a) Flanged, butt welding, or socket welding fittings pensation must be placed, in.
meeting the applicable ANSI standards listed in Table LNp limit of reinforcement measured normal to run
NB-3132-1, subject to the limitations or requirements pipe wall, in.
of this Subsection, are acceptable. Fittings that comply rp radius of the finished opening in the corroded
with the test requirements of ANSI B16.9 or of NB- condition, in.
3649 are not required to meet requirements for reinforce- Trp nominal thickness of the run pipe, not including
ment given in NB-3643.3. corrosion allowance or mill tolerance, in.
(b) Welded outlet fittings, cast or forged branches, pipe tbp minimum required thickness of the branch pipe,
adapters, couplings, or similar products with butt welding, not including corrosion allowance, according to
socket welding, or flanged ends are acceptable for attach- NB-3641.1, in.
ment to the run pipe when limited to types that have p tm − A
integral reinforcement and are attached to the main run trp minimum required thickness of the run pipe,
by welding [Figs. NB-4244(a)-1 and NB-4244(b)-1]. not including corrosion allowance, according to
(c) An extruded outlet at right angles to the run NB-3641.1, in.
pipe is acceptable. p tm − A
ap angle between axes of branch and run (90 deg.
NB-3643.3 Reinforcement for Openings ≥ a ≥ 60 deg.), deg.
(a) Nomenclature (3) The following terms are as shown in Fig. NB-
(1) The following terms are as shown in Fig. NB- 3643.3(a)-3.
3643.3(a)-1. Dop outside diameter of the run pipe, in.
dop outside diameter of the branch pipe, in. Top finished thickness of the extruded outlet in the
Rmp mean radius of the run pipe, in. corroded condition measured at a height equal to
rip inside radius of branch pipe, in. r2 above the outside surface of the main run, in.
rmp mean radius of the branch pipe, in. T′rp minimum thickness of the run pipe after extru-
p ri + 0.5Tb sion of the opening, not including corrosion
142
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1
FIG. NB-3643.3(a)-1 BRANCH CONNECTION NOMENCLATURE
143
FIG. NB-3643.3(a)-2 TYPICAL REINFORCEMENT OF OPENINGS
allowance or mill tolerance, in. Allowance shall (a) A single opening has a diameter not ex-
be made for thinning of the run pipe wall by ceeding 0.2√ RmTr, or, if there are two or more openings
the extrusion of the opening, if it occurs.
within any circle of diameter, 2.5√ RmTr, but the sum
hp height of the extruded lip, equal to or greater
of the diameters of such unreinforced openings shall
than r2, in.
(b) Requirements not exceed 0.25√ Rm Tr.
(1) Reinforcement shall be provided in amount (b) No two unreinforced openings shall have
and distribution so that the requirements for the area their centers closer to each other, measured on the
of reinforcement are satisfied for all planes through inside wall of the run pipe, than the sum of their
the center of the opening and normal to the surface diameters.
of the run pipe, except that openings need not be (c) No unreinforced opening shall have its center
provided with reinforcement if all of the requirements closer than 2.5√ RmTr to the edge of any other locally
of (a), (b), and (c) below are met. stressed area.
144
NB-3000 — DESIGN Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-3
FIG. NB-3643.3(a)-3 TYPICAL REINFORCED EXTRUDED OUTLET
145
(2) The total cross-sectional area of reinforcement LN p 0.5 √ rn Tb

A required in any given plane for a pipe under internal
pressure shall not be less than:
(d) Metal Available for Reinforcement
A p dtr (2 − sin a) (1) Metal may be counted as contributing to the
area of reinforcement called for in NB-3643.3(b) if it
lies within the area of reinforcement specified in NB-
(3) The required reinforcing material shall be uni- 3643.3(c), and it shall be limited to material that meets
formly distributed around the periphery of the branch the requirements of (a), (b), and (c) below:
except that, in the case of branches not at right angles, (a) metal forming a part of the run wall that
the designer may elect to provide additional reinforce- is in excess of that required on the basis of NB-3641.1
ment in the area of the crotch. and is exclusive of corrosion allowance shown in Fig.
(c) Limits of Reinforcement. The boundaries of the NB-3643.3(a)-2;
cross-sectional area in any plane passing through the (b) similar excess metal in the branch wall, if
axis of the opening within which metal may be located the branch is integral with the run wall or is joined
to have value as reinforcement are designated as the to it by a full penetration weld, as denoted by A1 in
limits of reinforcement for that plane, and they are Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-2;
given in (1) and (2) below. (c) weld metal that is fully continuous with the
(1) The limits of reinforcement, measured along wall of the run pipe, as denoted by area A2 in Fig.
the midsurface of the nominal wall thickness of the NB-3643.3(a)-2.
run pipe, LA, shall be at a distance on each side of (2) The mean coefficient of thermal expansion of
the axis of the opening that is equal to the greater of the metal to be included as reinforcement under (1)(b)
(a) or (b) below: and (1)(c) above shall be within 15% of the value for
(a) the diameter of the finished opening in the the metal in the wall of the run pipe.
corroded condition; or (3) Metal available for reinforcement shall not be
(b) the radius of the finished opening in the considered as applying to more than one opening.
corroded condition r, plus the nominal thickness of the (4) Metal not fully continuous with the run pipe,
run pipe Tr , plus the nominal thickness of the branch as that in branches attached by partial penetration welds,
wall Tb. shall not be counted as reinforcement.
(c) In addition, two-thirds of the required rein- (e) Strength of Metal. Material used for reinforcement
forcement shall be provided within the greater of the shall preferably be the same as that of the wall of the
limit given in (b) above and the limit L′A which is run pipe. If material with a lower design stress intensity
the greater of either Sm is used, the area provided by such material shall
not be counted at full value but shall be multiplied
r + 0.5 √ Rm Tr by the ratio (less than unity) of the design stress
intensity values Sm of the reinforcement material and
of the run pipe material before being counted as rein-
or forcement. No reduction in the reinforcement require-
ment may be taken for the increased strength of either
r + Tb / sin a + Tr the branch material or weld metal having a higher
design stress intensity value than that of the material
(2) The limits of reinforcement measured normal of the run pipe wall. The strength of the material at
to the wall of the run pipe LN shall conform to the the point under consideration shall be used in the
contour of the surface of the branch at a distance from fatigue analysis.
each surface equal to the limits given in (a) and (b) (f) Requirements for Extruded Outlets. Extruded out-
below and as shown in Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1. lets shall meet all of the requirements of NB-3643.3(a)
(a) For nozzle types of Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1 and NB-3643.3(b), and these rules apply only where
sketches (a), (b), and (d): the axis of the outlet intersects and is perpendicular
to the axis of the run pipe.
(1) Geometric Requirements
LN p 0.5 √ rm Tb + 0.5r2
(a) An extruded outlet is one in which the
extruded lip at the outlet has a height h above the
(b) For Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1 sketch (c): surface of the run pipe that is equal to or greater than
146
NB-3643.3 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3646
the transition radius between the extruded lip and the

run pipe r2.
(b) The minimum value of the transition radius
r2 shall not be less than 0.05do, except that on branch
pipe sizes larger than 30 in. (750 mm) the transition
radius need not exceed 1.5 in. (38 mm). The maximum
value of the transition radius r2 shall be limited as
follows: for branch pipes nominally 8 in. (DN 200)
and larger, the dimension of the transition radius shall
not exceed 0.10do + 0.50 in. (13 mm); for branch pipe
sizes nominally less than 8 in. (DN 200), r2 shall not
be greater than 1.25 in. (31 mm).
(c) When the external contour contains more FIG. NB-3644(b)-1 MITER JOINT GEOMETRY
than one radius, the radius of any arc sector of approxi-
mately 45 deg. shall meet the requirements given in
(b) above.
(d) Machining shall not be employed to meet NB-3644 Miters
the requirements of (b) and (c) above.
(2) Limits of Reinforcement Mitered joints may be used in piping systems under
(a) The height of the reinforcement zone shall the conditions stipulated in (a) through (d) below.
be limited as shown in Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-3: (a) The minimum thickness of a segment of a miter
shall be determined in accordance with NB-3641. The
LN p 0.5 √ do To minimum thickness thus determined does not allow for
the discontinuity stresses that exist at the junction
between segments. The discontinuity stresses are re-
(b) The half width of the reinforcement zone duced for a given miter as the number of segments is
shall be limited as shown in Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-3: increased.
(b) The angle u in Fig. NB-3644(b)-1 shall not be
LA p d more than 221⁄2 deg.
(c) The center line distance S between adjacent miters
(3) Metal Available for Reinforcement. The rein- shall be in accordance with Fig. NB-3644(b)-1.
forcement area shall be the sum of areas A1 + A2 + (d) Stress indices and flexibility factors shall be
A3 defined in (a), (b), and (c) below and shown in determined in accordance with the requirements of NB-
Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-3. Metal counted as reinforcement 3681(d).
shall not be applied to more than one opening.
(a) Area A1 is the area lying within the reinforce- NB-3646 Closures
ment zone that results from any excess thickness avail-
able in the wall of the branch pipe: (a) Closures in piping systems may be made by use
of closure fittings, such as blind flanges or threaded
A1 p 2LN (T ′b − tb ) or welded plugs or caps, either manufactured in accord-
ance with standards listed in Table NB-3132-1 and
used within the specified pressure–temperature ratings,
(b) Area A2 is the area lying within the reinforce-
or made in accordance with (b) below.
ment zone that results from excess thickness available
(b) Closures not manufactured in accordance with
in the lip of the extruded outlet:
the standards listed in Table NB-3132-1 may be made
in accordance with the rules for Class 2 vessels using
A2 p 2r2 (To − T ′b ) the equation:
(c) Area A3 is the area lying within the reinforce- tm p t + A

ment zone that results from any excess thickness in
the run pipe wall: where
tppressure design thickness, in., calculated for
A3 p d (T ′r − tr ) the given closure shape and direction of
147
loading using appropriate equations and pro- tmp minimum required thickness, in.
cedures for Class 2 Vessels, except that 1⁄
the symbols used to determine t shall be 2
defined as: t p d6 13P

16Sm 2 (8)
Apsum of mechanical allowances (NB-
3613), in.
PpDesign Pressure, psi where
Spapplicable design stress intensity value d6p inside diameter of the gasket for raised or flat
Sm from Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, face flanges or the pitch diameter of the gasket
Tables 2A and 2B, psi for retained gasketed flanges, in.
tmpminimum required thickness, in. Pp Design Pressure, psi
(c) Connections to closures may be made by welding Smp the design stress intensity value in accordance
or extruding. Connections to the closure shall be in with Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A
accordance with the limitations provided for such con- and 2B, psi
nections in NB-3643 and Figs. NB-4243-1, NB-4244(a)-
1, NB-4244(b)-1, and NB-4244(c)-1 for branch connec- NB-3647.3 Temporary Blanks. Blanks to be used 98
tions. If the size of the opening is greater than one- for test purposes only shall have a minimum thickness
half the inside diameter of the closure, the opening not less than the Design Pressure thickness t, calculated
should be considered as a reducer in accordance with from Eq. (8) above, except that P shall not be less
NB-3648. than the test pressure and the design stress intensity
(d) Openings in closures may be reinforced in accord- value Sm may be taken as 95% of the specified minimum
ance with the requirements of NB-3643. yield strength of the blank material (Section II, Part
(e) Flat heads that have an opening with a diameter D, Subpart 1, Table Y-1).
that does not exceed one-half of the head diameter
shall have a total cross-sectional area of reinforcement
not less than dt /2, where NB-3648 Reducers
dp the diameter of the finished opening, in. Reducer fittings manufactured in accordance with the
tp the design thickness for the closure, in. standards listed in Table NB-3132-1 shall be considered
suitable for use. Where butt welding reducers are made
to a nominal pipe thickness, the reducers shall be
NB-3647 Pressure Design of Flanged Joints
considered suitable for use with pipe of the same
and Blanks
nominal thickness.
NB-3647.1 Flanged Joints
(a) Flanged joints manufactured in accordance with
the standards listed in Table NB-3132-1, as limited NB-3649 Pressure Design of Other Piping
by NB-3612.1, shall be considered as meeting the Products
requirements of NB-3640.
Other piping products manufactured in accordance
(b) Flanged joints not included in Table NB-3132-
with the standards listed in Table NB-3132-1 shall be
1 shall be designed in accordance with XI-3000, includ-
considered suitable for use provided the design is
ing the use of the appropriate allowable stress given
consistent with the design philosophy of this Subsection.
in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A, 1B, and 3.
Piping products not included in Table NB-3132-1 may
NB-3647.2 Permanent Blanks. The minimum re- be used if they satisfy the requirements of NB-3200.
quired thickness of permanent blanks (Fig. NB-3647.2- The pressure design shall be based on an analysis
1) shall be calculated from the following equations: consistent with this Subsection, or experimental stress
analysis as described in Appendix II, or an ANSI B16.9
tm p t + A (7) type burst test. The bursting pressure in a B16.9 type
burst test shall be equal to or greater than that of the
where weakest pipe to be attached to the piping product,
Ap sum of the mechanical allowances, in. (NB- where the burst pressure of the weakest pipe is calculated
3613) by the equation:
tp pressure design thickness, in., calculated from
Eq. (8) P p 2St / Do
148
NB-3649 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3651.3
FIG. NB-3647.2-1 TYPES OF PERMANENT BLANKS
where the design criteria of NB-3611 provided they comply

Dop outside diameter of pipe, in. with these rules. To validate a design in accordance
Sp specified minimum tensile strength of pipe ma- with these rules, it is necessary to perform several
terial, psi flexibility analyses in accordance with the requirements
tp minimum specified wall thickness of pipe, in. of NB-3672 and to use the moments and forces obtained
from these analyses as required in NB-3650.
NB-3649.1 Expansion Joints. Rules are currently
under development for the application of expansion NB-3651.2 Piping Products for Which Stress Indi-
joints in piping systems. Until these rules are available, ces Are Not Available. For analysis of flanged joints,
expansion joints shall not be used in piping. see NB-3658. For other piping products for which
stress indices are not available, see NB-3680.
NB-3650 ANALYSIS OF PIPING PRODUCTS NB-3651.3 Attachments

(a) Lugs, brackets, stiffeners, and other attachments
NB-3651 General Requirements
may be welded, bolted, and studded to, or bear upon
NB-3651.1 Piping Products for Which Stress In- the outside or inside of piping. The interaction effects
dices Are Given. Piping products, for which values of attachments on the pressure boundary, producing
of stress indices B, C, and K are given in NB-3683.2 thermal gradients, localized bending stresses, stress
and which meet the requirements of NB-3640, satisfy concentrations, or restraint of the pressure boundary
149
shall be considered by the piping designer. Standard of NB-3653.1 through NB-3653.6 and the thermal stress
clamps generally have a negligible effect on the pressure ratchet requirement of NB-3653.7.
boundary. However, the effects of clamps on thin-wall
piping may need to be evaluated. NB-3653.1 Satisfaction of Primary Plus Secondary
(b) Attachments shall meet the requirements of Stress Intensity Range
NB-3135. (a) This calculation is based upon the effect of
(c) Figure NB-4433-1 shows some typical types of changes which occur in mechanical or thermal loadings
attachment welds (NB-4430). which take place as the system goes from one load
set, such as pressure, temperature, moment, and force
loading, to any other load set which follows it in time.
NB-3652 Consideration of Design Conditions It is the range of pressure, temperature, and moment
The primary stress intensity limit is satisfied if the between two load sets which is to be used in the
requirement of Eq. (9) is met: calculations. For example, one of the load sets to be
included is that corresponding to zero pressure, zero
PDo D moment, and room temperature. Equation (10) shall be
B1 + B2 o Mi ≤ 1.5 Sm (9)23 satisfied for all pairs of load sets:
2t 2I
Po D o D
where Sn p C 1 + C2 o Mi+C3 Eab
B1, B2pprimary stress indices for the specific prod- 2t 2I
uct under investigation (NB-3680)
Dopoutside diameter of pipe, in. (NB-3683) ×| aa Ta − ab Tb | ≤ 3Sm (10)
Ipmoment of inertia, in.4 (NB-3683)
Mipresultant moment due to a combination of (b) If for one or more pairs of load sets Eq. (10)
Design Mechanical Loads, in.-lb. All Design is not met, the piping product may still be satisfactory,
Mechanical Loads, and combinations thereof provided that the conditions of NB-3653.6 are met or
shall be provided in the Design Specifica- provided that the requirements of NB-3200 are satisfied.
tion. In the combination of loads, all direc- (c) The nomenclature used in Eq. (10) is defined as
tional moment components in the same follows:
direction shall be combined before determin- C1, C2, C3psecondary stress indices for the specific
ing the resultant moment (i.e., resultant mo- component under investigation (NB-
ments from different load sets shall not be 3680)
used in calculating the moment Mi). If the Do,t,I,Smp as defined for Eq. (9)
method of analysis for earthquake or other da(db )p inside diameter on side a(b) of a gross
dynamic loads is such that only magnitudes structural discontinuity or material dis-
without relative algebraic signs are obtained, continuity, in.
the most conservative combination shall be Eabpaverage modulus of elasticity of the two
assumed. sides of a gross structural discontinuity
PpDesign Pressure, psi or material discontinuity at room temper-
Smpallowable design stress intensity value, psi ature, psi (Section II, Part D, Subpart
(Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A 2, Tables TM)
and 2B) Mip resultant range of moment which occurs
tpnominal wall thickness of product, in. when the system goes from one service
(NB-3683) load set to another, in.-lb. Service loads
and combinations thereof shall be pro-
vided in the Design Specification. In the
NB-3653 Consideration of Level A Service combination of moments from load sets,
Limits all directional moment components in
All load sets, for which Level A Service Limits are the same direction shall be combined
to be evaluated, shall satisfy the fatigue requirements before determining the resultant moment
(i.e., resultant moments from different
23 For
load sets shall not be used in calculating
piping products, such as tees and branch connections, the
second term of Eqs. (9), (10), and (11), namely that containing Mb the moment range Mi). Weight effects
is to be calculated as referred to in NB-3683.1(d). need not be considered in determining the
150
NB-3653.1 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3653.2
loading range since they are noncyclic in coefficient of thermal expansion (a) both
character. If the method of analysis is at room temperature, psi /°F
such that only magnitudes without rela- K1, K2, K3plocal stress indices for the specific com-
tive algebraic signs are obtained, the ponent under investigation (NB-3680)
most conservative combination shall be | DT2 | pabsolute value of the range for that por-
assumed. If a combination includes re- tion of the nonlinear thermal gradient
versing dynamic loads, Mi shall be either: through the wall thickness not included
(1) the resultant range of moment due in DT1 as shown below, °F
to the combination of all loads consider- | DT1 | pabsolute value of the range of the temper-
ing one-half the range of the reversing ature difference between the temperature
dynamic loads; or (2) the resultant range of the outside surface To and the tempera-
of moment due to the full range of the ture of the inside surface Ti of the piping
reversing dynamic loads alone, which- product assuming moment generating
ever is greater. equivalent linear temperature distribu-
Poprange of service pressure, psi tion, °F
Ta(Tb)p range of average temperature on side For a quantitative definition of | DT1 | and | DT2 |,
a(b) of gross structural discontinuity or see NB-3653.2(b) below. All other terms are as defined
material discontinuity, °F. For generally for Eq. (10).
cylindrical shapes, the averaging of T (b) Quantitative Definitions of | DT1 | and | DT2 |.
(NB-3653.2) shall be over a distance of
√ data for Ta and over a distance of The following nomenclature is used:
Tipvalue of T(y) at inside surface, °F
√ dbtb for Tb.
ta(tb )paverage wall thickness through the pT(−t /2)
Top value of T(y) at outside surface, °F
length √ data (√ dbtb), in. A trial and pT(t /2)
error solution for ta and tb may be nec- Tj (y), Tk (y)p temperature, as a function of radial posi-
essary. tion, for load set j and load set k, respec-
aa(ab )p coefficient of thermal expansion on side tively, °F
a(b) of a gross structural discontinuity T(y)p temperature distribution range from con-
or material discontinuity, at room temper- dition j to condition k, °F
ature, 1 / °F (Section II, Part D, Subpart pTk(y) − Tj(y)
2, Tables TE) tp thickness of the wall of the pipe or
NB-3653.2 Satisfaction of Peak Stress Intensity element, in.
Range ypradial position in the wall, measured
(a) For every pair of load sets (NB-3653), calculate positive outward from the midthickness
Sp values using Eq. (11): position (−t /2 ≤ y ≤ t /2), in.
Then the temperature distribution range T(y) may be
Po D o D thought of as being composed of three parts:
S p p K1 C1 + K2 C 2 o M i (1) a constant value:
2t 2I
1
E
t/2
+ K3 E a | DT1 | + K3 C3 Eab T p (1 / t) T( y)dy
2(1 − v) -t /2
1
× | a a Ta − a b Tb | + E a | DT2 | (11)
1−v which is the average value through the thickness. T
may be used in determining free thermal expansions.
Also, the values of T determined (for the same pair
NOTE: This simplified analysis is intended to provide a value of of load sets) or two locations a and b on either side
Sp that conservatively estimates the sum of PL + Pb + Pe + Q + F
as required in Fig. NB-3222-1.
of a gross discontinuity may be used for Ta and Tb
in Eqs. (10) and (11).
The nomenclature used in Eq. (11) is defined as follows: (2) a linear portion, with zero average value, hav-
Eapmodulus of elasticity (E) times the mean ing variation given by:
151
FIG. NB-3653.2(b)-1 DECOMPOSITION OF TEMPERATURE DISTRIBUTION RANGE
E
t/2
3650. Only those pairs of load sets which do not satisfy
V p (12 / t 2 ) yT( y)dy
-t /2 Eq. (10) need be considered.
(a) Equation (12) shall be met:
(3) a nonlinear portion with a zero average value
and a zero first moment with respect to the mid- Do
Se p C2 Mi* ≤ 3 Sm (12)
thickness. This decomposition of T(y) into three parts 2I
is illustrated in Fig. NB-3653.2(b)-1. The value of DT1
to be used in Eq. (11) is the variation V of the linear where
portion: Mi*p same as Mi in Eq. (10), except that it includes
only moments due to thermal expansion and
DT1 p V thermal anchor movements, in.-lb
Sep nominal value of expansion stress, psi
The value of DT2 to be used in Eq. (11) is as follows: (b) The primary plus secondary membrane plus bend-
ing stress intensity, excluding thermal bending and
DT2 p max. (| To − T | − 1⁄2 | DT1 |, | Ti − T | −1⁄2 | DT1 | , 0) thermal expansion stresses, shall be < 3Sm. This require-
ment is satisfied by meeting Eq. (13) below:
NB-3653.3 Alternating Stress Intensity. The alter- Po Do D M

nating stress intensity Salt is equal to one-half the value C1 + C2 o i + C ′3 Eab
2t 2I
of Sp (SaltpSp /2) calculated in Eq. (11) above. (13)
NB-3653.4 Use of Design Fatigue Curve. Enter the × | aa Ta − ab Tb | ≤ 3Sm
applicable design fatigue curve, Figs. I-9.0, on the
ordinate using Sa p Salt, and find the corresponding where
number of cycles on the abscissa. If the service cycle C′3p values in Table NB-3681(a)-1
being considered is the only one that produces significant Mip as defined in NB-3652 and all other variables
fluctuating stresses, this is the allowable number of are as defined in NB-3653
cycles. (c) If these conditions are met, the value of Salt shall
NB-3653.5 Cumulative Damage. The cumulative be calculated by Eq. (14):
damage shall be evaluated in accordance with NB-
Sp
3222.4(e)(5). If Ni is greater than the maximum number Salt p Ke (14)
of cycles defined on the applicable design fatigue curve, 2
the value of ni /Ni may be taken as zero.
where
NB-3653.6 Simplified Elastic–Plastic Discontinuity Kep 1.0 for Sn ≤ 3Sm
Analysis. If Eq. (10) cannot be satisfied for all pairs p 1.0 + [(1 − n) /n(m − 1)](Sn /3Sm − 1), for 3 Sm
of load sets, the alternative analysis described below < Sn < 3mSm
may still permit qualifying the component under NB- p 1 /n, for Sn ≥ 3mSm
152
NB-3653.6 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3655.3
m, np material parameters given in Table NB- are designated, the requirements of (a) or (b) below
3228.5(b)-1 shall apply.
Saltp alternating stress intensity, psi (a) For Service Loadings for which Level B Service
Snp primary plus secondary stress intensity value Limits are designated which do not include reversing
calculated in Eq. (10), NB-3653.1, psi dynamic loads (NB-3622.2) or have reversing dynamic
Spp peak stress intensity value calculated by Eq. loads combined with nonreversing dynamic loads (NB-
(11), (NB-3653.2), psi 3622.4), the conditions of Eq. (9) shall be met using
Salt for all load sets shall be calculated in accordance Service Level B coincident pressure P and moments
with NB-3653.3 or Eq. (14). Using the alternating stress Mi which result in the maximum calculated stress. The
intensity values calculated by the above procedures, allowable stress to be used for this condition is 1.8Sm,
determine the cumulative usage factor in accordance but not greater than 1.5Sy.
with NB-3653.4 and NB-3653.5. The cumulative usage Syp yield strength value, psi, taken at average fluid
factor shall not exceed 1.0. temperature of the transient under consideration
NB-3653.7 Thermal Stress Ratchet. For all pairs (b) For Service Loadings for which Level B Service
of load sets, the value of the range of DT1 cannot Limits are designated which include reversing dynamic
exceed that calculated as follows: loads that are not required to be combined with nonre-
versing dynamic loads, the requirements of NB-3653
y ′ Sy
for Level A Service Limits shall be met. In addition,
DT1 range ≤ C4 any deflection limits prescribed by the Design Specifica-
0.7 E a tion must be satisfied.
where NB-3655 Consideration of Level C Service

C4p 1.1 for ferritic material Limits
p 1.3 for austenitic material
NB-3655.1 Permissible Pressure. When Level C
Eap as defined for Eq. (11), psi / °F
Service Limits [NCA-2142.4(b)(3) and NB-3113(b)] are
Pp maximum pressure for the set of conditions un-
specified, the permissible pressure shall not exceed the
der consideration, psi
pressure Pa, calculated in accordance with Eq. (3) of
Syp yield strength value, psi, taken at average fluid
NB-3641.1, by more than 50%.
temperature of the transient under consideration
xp (PDo /2t) (1 /Sy) NB-3655.2 Analysis of Piping Components. For
y′p 3.33, 2.00, 1.20, and 0.80 for x p 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, Service Loadings for which Level C Service Limits
and 0.8, respectively [NCA-2142.4(b)(3) and NB-3113(b)] are designated,
the requirements of (a) or (b) below shall apply.
(a) For Service Loadings for which Level C Service
NB-3654 Consideration of Level B Service Limits are designated which do not include reversing
Limits dynamic loads or have reversing dynamic loads com-
bined with nonreversing dynamic loads, the conditions
The procedures for analyzing Service Loadings for of Eq. (9) of NB-3652 shall be met using Service
which Level B Service Limits are designated, are the Level C coincident pressure P and moments Mi which
same as those given in NB-3653 for Level A Service result in the maximum calculated stress. The allowable
Limits. All load sets, including Level A and Level B stress to be used for this condition is 2.25Sm but not
Service Loadings, shall satisfy the fatigue requirements greater than 1.8Sy.
of NB-3653.1 through NB-3653.6 and the thermal stress (b) For Service Loadings for which Level C Service
ratchet requirement of NB-3653.7. Limits are designated which include reversing dynamic
loads that are not required to be combined with nonre-
NB-3654.1 Permissible Pressure. For Level B Service versing dynamic loads, the requirements of NB-3656(b)
Limits [NCA-2142.4(b)(2)], the permissible pressure shall be satisfied using the allowable stress in NB-
shall not exceed the pressure Pa , calculated in accordance 3656(b)(2), 70% of the allowable stress in NB-3656(b)(3),
with Eq. (3) of NB-3641.1, by more than 10%. and 70% of the allowable loads in NB-3656(b)(4).
NB-3654.2 Analysis of Piping Components. For NB-3655.3 Deformation Limits. Any deformation or
Service Loadings for which Level B Service Limits deflection limits prescribed by the Design Specifications
153
shall be considered with respect to Level C Service reversing type dynamic events and weight.
Limits. Earthquake and other reversing dynamic loads
shall be computed from a linear elastic response
spectrum analysis as defined in Appendix N-
NB-3656 Consideration of Level D Service 1226, except the spectrum peak broadening
Limits value nfg in N-1226.3 shall not be less than
If the Design Specifications specify any Service 15% and, in place of the damping values for
Loading for which Level D Limits are designated both large and small diameter piping systems in
[NCA-2142.2(b)(4)], the requirements of (a), (b), or Table N-1230-1 for Operating Basis Earthquake
(c) below shall apply. and Safe Shutdown Earthquake, a value of 5
(a) For Service Loadings for which Level D Service shall be used. The ground motion design input
Limits are designated which do not include reversing for generating the floor response spectrum to
dynamic loads or have reversing dynamic loads com- be used in the linear elastic analysis shall meet
bined with nonreversing dynamic loads, the require- the requirements of Appendix N-1211(a) and N-
ments of (1) and (2) below shall apply. 1211(b). Moments and forces may be computed
(1) The permissible pressure shall not exceed 2.0 using a methodology other than prescribed
times the pressure Pa calculated in accordance with above if the alternate methodology is demon-
Eq. (3) of NB-3641.1. strated to produce results which envelope the
(2) The conditions of Eq. (9) of NB-3652 shall prescribed methodology results. In the combina-
be met. The allowable stress to be used for this condition tion of loads, all directional moment compo-
is 3.0 Sm, but not greater than 2.0 Sy. nents in the same direction shall be combined
(b) For piping fabricated from material designated before determining the resultant moment. If the
P-No. 1 through P-No. 9 in Table 2A, Section II, Part method of analysis is such that only magnitude
D and limited to D /t ≤ 50 if Level D Service Limits without algebraic signs is obtained, the most
are designated which include reversing dynamic loads conservative combination shall be assumed.
that are not required to be combined with nonreversing PDp the pressure occurring coincident with the re-
dynamic loads, the requirements of (1) through (5) versing dynamic load
below shall apply. (4) The range of the resultant moment MAM and
(1) The pressure occurring coincident with the the amplitude of the longitudinal force FAM resulting
earthquake or other reversing type loading shall not from the anchor motions due to earthquake and other
exceed the Design Pressure. reversing type dynamic loading shall not exceed the
(2) The sustained stress due to weight loading following:
shall not exceed the following:
MAM DO
DO C2 < S1
B2 MW ≤ 0.5 Sm 2I
2I
where
MWp resultant moment due to weight effects (NB- FAM
< S2
3623) AM
(3) The stress due to weight and inertial loading
due to reversing dynamic loads in combination with
where
the Level D coincident pressure shall not exceed the
AMp cross–sectional area of metal in the piping com-
following:
ponent wall
S1p 6Sm
PD D O DO
B1 + B2 ME ≤ 4.5 Sm S2p 1.0Sm
2t 2I (5) Piping displacements shall satisfy Design Spec-
ification limitations.
(c) As an alternative to NB-3656(a) and (b), the
where rules contained in Appendix F may be used in evaluating
MEp the amplitude of the resultant moment due to these service loadings independently of all other Design
the inertial loading from the earthquake, other and Service Loadings.
154
NB-3657 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3661.3
NB-3657 Test Loadings Mfd ≤ 6250(Sy / 36,000) CAb (16)

The evaluation of Test Loadings shall be carried out
in accordance with NB-3226. where
Mfdpbending or torsional moment (considered
separately) as defined for Mfs , but including
dynamic loadings, in.-lb
NB-3658 Analysis of Flanged Joints
NB-3658.2 Level C Service Limits 98
The pressure design of flanged joints is covered by
(a) The pressure shall not exceed 1.5 times the rated
NB-3647.1. Flanged joints subjected to combinations
pressure.
of moment and pressure shall meet the requirements
(b) The limitation given by Eq. (17) shall be met:
of this paragraph. In addition, the pipe-to-flange welds
shall meet the requirements of NB-3652 through NB-
3656 using appropriate stress indices from Table NB- Mfd ≤ [11,250Ab −(␲ / 16)Df2 Pfd ] C(Sy / 36,000) (17)
3681(a)-1. Flanged joints using flanges, bolting, and
gaskets as specified in ANSI B16.5 and using a bolt
material having an Sm value at 100°F (38°C) not less where
than 20.0 ksi (138 MPa) may be analyzed in accordance Df poutside diameter of raised face, in.
with the following rules or in accordance with NB-3200. Pfdppressure concurrent with Mfd, psi
Other flanged joints shall be analyzed in accordance with Mfd, C, Sy , the limitation on Sy /36,000, and Ab are
NB-3200. defined in NB-3658.1(b).
98 NB-3658.1 Design Limits, Levels A and B Service NB-3658.3 Level D Service Limits 98
Limits (a) The pressure shall not exceed 2.0 times the rated
(a) The pressure shall not exceed the rated pressure pressure.
for Level A Service Limits or 1.1 times the rated (b) The limitation given by Eq. (17) of NB-3658.2(b)
pressure for Level B Service Limits. shall be met, where Pfd and Mfd are pressures, psi, and
(b) The bolting shall meet the requirements of NB- moments, in.-lb, occurring concurrently.
3232. In addition, the limitations given by Eqs. (15)
NB-3658.4 Test Loadings. Analysis for Test Load-
and (16) shall be met:
ings is not required.
Mfs ≤ 3125 (Sy / 36,000) CAb (15)
NB-3660 DESIGN OF WELDS
where NB-3661 Welded Joints

Abptotal cross-sectional area of bolts at root of NB-3661.1 General Requirements. Welded joints
thread or section of least diameter under shall be made in accordance with NB-4200.
stress, sq in.
Cpdiameter of bolt circle, in. NB-3661.2 Socket Welds24 A99
Mfspbending or torsional moment (considered (a) Socket welded piping joints shall be limited to
separately) applied to the joint due to weight, pipe sizes of 2 in. and less.
thermal expansion of the piping, sustained (b) Socket welds shall comply with the requirements
anchor movements, relief valve steady-state of NB-4427.
thrust, and other sustained mechanical loads
applied to the flanged joint during the design NB-3661.3 Partial Penetration Welds for Branch
or service conditions, in.-lb. If cold spring- Connections
ing is used, the moment may be reduced (a) Partial penetration welds are allowed for branch
to the extent permitted by NB-3672.8. connections in which there are substantially no piping
Sypyield strength of flange material at Design reactions transmitted from the branch, such as openings
Temperature (Section II, Part D, Subpart 1,
Table Y-1), psi. The value of Sy /36,000 24 Socket welds shall not be used where the existence of crevices
shall not be taken as greater than unity. could accelerate corrosion.
155

for instrumentation. The ratio of nominal pipe size of and specifications listed in Table NB-3132-1 and re-
the main pipe to that of the branch shall not be less quirements (b) and (c) below. In the absence of such
than 10. Maximum branch size shall not exceed 2 in. standards or specifications, the Designer shall determine
nominal pipe size (DN 50). For such branch connections, that the type of fitting selected is adequate and safe
all reinforcing shall be an integral part of the pipe for the Design Loadings in accordance with the require-
penetrated. Partial penetration welds shall be of suffi- ments of (a), (b), and (c) below.
cient size to develop the full strength of the branch. (a) The pressure design shall meet the requirements
Reinforcing requirements of NB-3643 shall be met. of NB-3649.
(b) Partial penetration branch connections shall be (b) Fittings and their joints shall be suitable for the
groove welds as shown in Fig. NB-4244(d)-1. These tubing with which they are to be used in accordance
welds shall be capable of being examined in accordance with the minimum wall thickness of the tubing and
with the requirements of NB-5245. method of assembly recommended by the manufacturer.
(c) The inner corners of finished openings, in which (c) Fittings shall not be used in services that exceed
the branch does not extend beyond the inner surface the manufacturer’s maximum pressure–temperature rec-
of the pipe penetrated, shall be rounded to a minimum ommendations.
radius of one-fourth the thickness tn of the penetrating
part or 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), whichever is smaller. The NB-3671.5 Caulked Joints. Caulked or leaded joints
corners of the end of each branch extending less than shall not be used.
√ dtn beyond the inner surface of the pipe penetrated NB-3671.6 Brazed and Soldered Joints
shall be rounded to radius of one-half the thickness tn (a) Brazed Joints
of the penetrating part or 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), whichever (1) Brazed joints of a maximum nominal pipe size
is smaller. of 1 in. may be used only at dead end instrument
connections and in special applications where space
and geometry conditions prevent the use of joints
NB-3670 SPECIAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS permitted under NB-3661.2, NB-3661.3, and NB-
3671.4. The depth of socket shall be at least equal to
NB-3671 Selection and Limitation of that required for socket welding fittings and shall be
Nonwelded Piping Joints of sufficient depth to develop a rupture strength equal
The type of piping joint used shall be suitable to that of the pipe at Design Temperature (NB-4500).
for the Design Loadings and shall be selected with (2) Brazed joints that depend upon a fillet rather
consideration of joint tightness, mechanical strength, than a capillary type filler addition are not acceptable.
and the nature of the fluid handled. Piping joints shall (3) Brazed joints shall not be used in systems
conform to the requirements of this Subsection with containing flammable fluids or in areas where fire
leak tightness being a consideration in selection and hazards are involved.
design of joints for piping systems to satisfy the require- (b) Soldered Joints. Soldered joints shall not be used.
ments of the Design Specifications. NB-3671.7 Sleeve Coupled and Other Patented
NB-3671.1 Flanged Joints. Flanged joints are per- Joints. Mechanical joints, for which no standards exist,
mitted. and other patented joints may be used provided the
requirements of (a), (b), and (c) below are met.
NB-3671.2 Expanded Joints. Expanded joints shall (a) Provision is made to prevent separation of the
not be used. joints under all Service Loadings.
NB-3671.3 Threaded Joints. Threaded joints in (b) They are accessible for maintenance, removal,
which the threads provide the only seal shall not be and replacement after service.
used. If a seal weld is employed as the sealing medium, (c) Either of the following two criteria are met.
the stress analysis of the joint must include the stresses (1) A prototype joint has been subjected to per-
in the weld resulting from the relative deflections of formance tests to determine the safety of the joint
the mated parts. under simulated service conditions. When vibration,
fatigue, cyclic conditions, low temperature, thermal
NB-3671.4 Flared, Flareless, and Compression expansion, or hydraulic shock is anticipated, the applica-
Joints. Flared, flareless, and compression type tubing ble conditions shall be incorporated in the tests. The
fittings may be used for tubing sizes not exceeding 1 mechanical joints shall be sufficiently leak tight to
in. O.D. within the limitations of applicable standards satisfy the requirements of the Design Specifications.
156

NB-3671.7 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3674
(2) Joints are designed in accordance with the stresses in combination with stresses from other causes
rules of NB-3200. shall be evaluated in accordance with NB-3611 or
NB-3630.
NB-3672 Expansion and Flexibility NB-3672.6 Method of Analysis. All systems shall be
analyzed for adequate flexibility by a rigorous structural
(a) In addition to meeting the design requirements
analysis unless they can be judged technically adequate
for pressure, weight, and other loadings, piping systems
by an engineering comparison with previously analyzed
shall be designed to absorb or resist thermal expansion
systems.
or contraction or similar movements imposed by other
sources and shall meet the criteria for allowable stress NB-3672.7 Basic Assumptions and Requirements
intensity as specified in NB-3611. Piping systems shall (a) When calculating the flexibility of a piping system
be designed to have sufficient flexibility to prevent the between anchor points, the system between the anchor
movements from causing: points shall be treated as a whole. The significance of
(1) failure of piping or anchors from overstress all parts of the line and of all restraints, such as
or overstrain; supports or guides, including intermediate restraints
(2) leakage at joints; introduced for the purpose of reducing moments and
(3) detrimental distortion of connected equipment forces on equipment or small branch lines, shall be
resulting from excessive thrusts and moments. considered.
(b) The effects of stresses, caused by pressure, ther- (b) Comprehensive calculations shall take into ac-
mal expansion, and other loads and their stress intensifi- count the flexibility factors and stress indices found to
cation factors, shall be considered cumulatively. exist in piping products other than straight pipe. Credit
NB-3672.1 Properties. Thermal expansion data and may be taken where extra flexibility exists in the piping
moduli of elasticity shall be determined from Section system. Flexibility factors and stress indices are given
II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TE and TM, which cover in NB-3680.
more commonly used piping materials. For materials (c) The total expansion range shall be used in all
not included in these tables, reference shall be to calculations whether or not the piping is cold sprung.
authoritative source data, such as publications of the Not only the expansion of the line itself, but also linear
National Institute of Standards and Technology. and angular movements of the equipment and supports
to which it is attached, shall be considered.
NB-3672.2 Unit Thermal Expansion Range. The (d) Where assumptions are used in calculations or
unit thermal expansion range in in. /100 ft, used in model tests, the likelihood of underestimates of forces,
calculating the expansion range, shall be determined moments, and stresses, including the effects of stress
from Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TE as the intensification, shall be evaluated.
algebraic difference between the unit expansion shown
for the highest metal temperature and that for the lowest NB-3672.8 Cold Springing. Cold springing provides
metal temperature resulting from service or shutdown a beneficial effect in assisting a system to attain its
conditions. most favorable position sooner. The effect of cold
springing shall be analyzed as any other movement in
NB-3672.3 Moduli of Elasticity. The moduli of the system is analyzed. The maximum stress allowed
elasticity for ferrous and nonferrous materials shall be due to cold springing is 2.0Sm at the cold spring
as given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TM. temperature. Since the usual erection procedures may
NB-3672.4 Poisson’s Ratio. When required for flex- not permit accurate determination of cold spring in a
ibility calculations, Poisson’s ratio shall be taken as piping system, the allowable reduction of forces and
0.3 for all metals at all temperatures. moments at anchors or equipment caused by cold
springing shall be limited to no more than two-thirds
NB-3672.5 Stresses. Flexibility calculations of the of the calculated reduction.
moments and forces in the piping system due to thermal
expansion and end motions shall be based on the hot
modulus Eh. Calculations for the expansion stresses
NB-3674 Design of Pipe Supporting Elements
shall be based on the least cross-sectional area of the
pipe or fitting, using nominal dimensions. The expansion Supporting elements, including hangers, anchors, and
stress computed from the forces and moments shall be sliding supports, shall be designed in accordance with
multiplied by the ratio Ec /Eh. The effect of expansion the requirements of Subsection NF.
157
NB-3677 Pressure Relief Piping indices to be used with Eqs. (9), (10), and (11) of NB-
3650 are given in Table NB-3681(a)-1. The applicable
NB-3677.1 General Requirements. Pressure relief
indices to be used with the detailed analysis of NB-
piping within the scope of this Subsection shall be
3200 are given in NB-3685 and NB-3338.
supported to sustain reaction forces and shall conform
(b) Methods of determining flexibility factors for
to the requirements of the following subparagraphs.
some commonly used piping products are given in
NB-3677.2 Piping to Pressure Relieving Safety NB-3686.
Devices (c) Values of stress indices are tabulated for com-
(a) Piping that connects a pressure relieving safety monly used piping products and joints. Unless specific
device to a piping system shall comply with all the data, which shall be referenced in the Design Report,
requirements of the class of piping of the system which exist that would warrant lower stress indices than
it is designated to relieve. those tabulated or higher flexibility factors than those
(b) There shall be no intervening stop valves between calculated by the methods of NB-3686, the stress indices
systems being protected and their protective device or given shall be used as minimums and the flexibility
devices except as provided for in NB-7142. factors shall be used as maximums.
NB-3677.3 Discharge Piping From Pressure Reliev- (d) For piping products not covered by NB-3680,
ing Safety Devices stress indices and flexibility factors shall be established
(a) Discharge piping from pressure relieving safety by experimental analysis (Appendix II) or theoretical
devices shall comply with the requirements applicable analysis. Such test data or theoretical analysis shall be
to the conditions under which it operates. included in the Design Report.
(b) There shall be no intervening stop valve between (e) When determining stress indices by experimental
the protective device or devices and the point of methods, the nominal stress at the point under consider-
discharge except as provided for in NB-7142. ation (crack site, point of maximum stress intensity,
(c) The effluent from relief devices may be dis- etc.) shall be used.
charged outside the containment only if adequate provi-
sions are made for the safe disposal of the effluent. NB-3682 Definitions of Stress Indices and
It shall not impinge on other piping or structure or Flexibility Factors
equipment and shall be directed away from platforms
and other areas which might be used by personnel. (a) The general definition of a stress index for me-
(d) It is recommended that individual discharge lines chanical loads is:
be used, but, if two or more reliefs are combined, the
discharge piping shall be designed with sufficient flow s
B, C, K, or i p
area to prevent undue back pressure. S
(e) When the umbrella or drip pan type of connection
between the pressure relieving safety device and the where
discharge piping is used, the discharge piping shall be Sp nominal stress, psi, due to load L
so designed as to prevent binding due to expansion sp elastic stress, psi, due to load L
movements and shall be so dimensioned as to prevent
For B indices, s represents the stress magnitude corres-
the possibility of blow back of the effluent. Individual
ponding to a limit load. For C or K indices, s represents
discharge lines shall be used in this application. Drain-
the maximum stress intensity due to load L. For i
age shall be provided to remove water collected above
factors, s represents the principal stress at a particular
the safety valve seat.
point, surface, and direction due to load L. The nominal
(f) Discharge lines from pressure relieving safety
stress S is defined in detail in the tables of stress
devices within the scope of this Subsection shall be
indices.
designed to facilitate drainage if there is any possibility
(b) The general definition of a stress index for thermal
that the effluent can contain liquid.
loads is:
NB-3680 STRESS INDICES AND
s
FLEXIBILITY FACTORS C or K p
E a DT
NB-3681 Scope
(a) There are two types of analyses allowed by the where
rules of this Subarticle. The applicable B, C, and K Ep modulus of elasticity, psi
158
NB-3000 — DESIGN Table NB-3681(a)-1
TABLE NB-3681(a)-1 98
STRESS INDICES1 FOR USE WITH EQUATIONS IN NB-3650
Applicable for Do /t ≤ 100 for C or K Indices and Do /t ≤ 50 for B Indices

Internal Pressure Moment Loading
[Note (2)] [Note (2)] Thermal Loading
Piping Products and Joints B1 C1 K1 B2 C2 K2 C3 C ′3 K3
[Note (3)] [Note (4)] [Note (4)] [Note (4)] [Note (4)] [Note (4)] Notes
Straight pipe, remote from welds 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ... 1.0 (5)
or other discontinuities
Longitudinal butt welds in straight

pipe
(a) flush 0.5 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.0 ... 1.1 (6)
(b) as-welded t > 3⁄16 in. 0.5 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.0 ... 1.2 (6)
(c) as-welded t ≤ 3⁄16 in. 0.5 1.4 2.5 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.0 ... 1.2 (6)
Girth butt welds between nominally

identical wall thickness items
(a) flush 0.5 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.1 0.60 0.50 1.1 (7)
(b) as-welded 0.5 1.0 1.2 1.0 ... 1.8 0.60 0.50 1.7 (7)
Girth fillet weld to socket weld, ... ... 3.0 ... ... 2.0 2.0 1.0 3.0 (8)
fittings, socket weld valves, slip-
on or socket welding flanges
NB-4250 Transitions
(a) flush 0.5 ... 1.1 1.0 ... 1.1 ... 1.0 1.1 (9)
(b) as-welded 0.5 ... 1.2 1.0 ... 1.8 ... 1.0 1.7 (9)
Transitions within a 1:3 slope

envelope
(a) flush 0.5 ... 1.2 1.0 ... 1.1 ... 0.60 1.1 (10)
(b) as-welded 0.5 ... 1.2 1.0 ... 1.8 ... 0.60 1.7 (10)
Butt welding reducers per ANSI ... ... ... 1.0 ... ... 1.0 0.5 1.0 (11)
B16.9 or MSS SP-87
Curved pipe or butt welding elbows ... ... 1.0 ... ... 1.0 1.0 0.5 1.0 (12)
Branch connections per NB-3643 0.5 ... 2.0 ... ... ... 1.8 1.0 1.7 (13)
Butt welding tees 0.5 1.5 4.0 ... ... ... 1.0 0.5 1.0 (14)
NOTES:
(1) For indices not listed, see the note referenced at the end of the applicable line.
(2) For the calculation of pressure and moment loads and special instructions regarding Eqs. (9) through (13), see NB-3683.1(d).
(3) For definitions, applicability, and specific restrictions, see NB-3683.
(4) For special instructions regarding the use of these indices for welded products, intersecting welds, abutting products, or out-of-round
products, see NB-3683.2.
(5) See NB-3683.3, Straight Pipe Remote From Welds.
(6) See NB-3683.4(a), Longitudinal Butt Welds.
(7) See NB-3683.4(b), Girth Butt Welds.
(8) See NB-3683.4(c), Girth Fillet Welds.
(9) See NB-3683.5(a), NB-4250 Transitions.
(10) See NB-3683.5(b), Transitions Within a 1:3 Slope.
(11) See NB-3683.6, Concentric and Eccentric Reducers.
(12) See NB-3683.7, Curved Pipe or Butt Welding Elbows. See also NB-3683.2(a) and NB-3683.2(b).
(13) See NB-3683.8, Branch Connections per NB-3643. See also NB-3683.1(d).
(14) See NB-3683.9, Butt Welding Tees. See also NB-3683.1(d).
159
ap coefficient of thermal expansion Dminpminimum outside diameter of cross sec-

DTp thermal difference, °F tion, in.
sp maximum stress intensity, psi, due to thermal D1pnominal outside diameter at large end of
difference DT concentric and eccentric reducers, in. (see
The values of E, a, and DT are defined in detail in NB-3683.6)
NB-3650. D2pnominal outside diameter at small end of
(c) Flexibility factors are identified herein by k with concentric and eccentric reducers, in. (see
appropriate subscripts. The general definition of a flexi- NB-3683.6)
bility factor is: dopnominal outside diameter of attached branch
pipe, in.
k p uab / unom dipnominal inside diameter of branch, in.
dmpnominal mean diameter of reinforced or
where unreinforced branch, in. [see NB-3683.8(c)]
uabp rotation of end a, with respect to end b, due to p(di + tn)
a moment load M and in the direction of the hpcharacteristic bend parameter of a curved
moment M pipe or butt welding elbow
unomp nominal rotation due to moment load M ptR /rm2
The flexibility factor k and nominal rotation unom are Ipmoment of inertia of pipe, in.4
defined in detail for specific components in NB-3686. p0.0491 (Do4−Di4)
L1pheight of nozzle reinforcement for branch
connections, in. [see Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1]
NB-3683 Stress Indices for Use With NB-3650 L1,L2plength of cylindrical portion at the large
The stress indices given herein and in Table NB- end and small end of a reducer, respectively
3681(a)-1 and subject to the additional restrictions (see NB-3683.6)
specified herein are to be used with the analysis methods Rpnominal bend radius of curved pipe or el-
of NB-3650. For piping products outside the applicable bow, in.
range, stress indices shall be established in accordance Rmpmean radius of designated run pipe, in. [see
with NB-3681. NB-3683.8 and Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1]
p(Do−Tr) /2
98 NB-3683.1 Nomenclature
ripinside radius of branch, in. [see Fig. NB-
(a) Dimensions. Nominal dimensions as specified in
3643.3(a)-1]
the dimensional standards of Table NB-3132-1 shall
pdi /2
be used for calculating the numerical values of the
rmpmean pipe radius, in.
stress indices given herein and in Table NB-3681(a)-
p(Do−t) /2
1, and for evaluating Eqs. (9) through (14) of NB-
r′mpmean radius of attached branch pipe, in.
3650. For ANSI B16.9, ANSI B16.28, or MSS SP-87
piping products, the nominal dimensions of the equiva- [see Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1]
lent pipe (for example, Schedule 40) as certified by p(do−T′b) /2
the manufacturer shall be used. Not more than one rppoutside radius of reinforced nozzle or branch
equivalent pipe size shall be certified for given product connection, in. [see Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1]
items of the same size, shape, and weight. r1,r2,r3pdesignated radii for reinforced branch con-
For piping products such as reducers and tapered- nections, concentric and eccentric reducers,
wall transitions which have different dimensions at in. [see NB-3683.6, NB-3683.8, and Fig.
either end, the nominal dimensions of the large or NB-3643.3(a)-1]
small end, whichever gives the larger value of Do /t, Tbpwall thickness of branch connection rein-
shall be used. Dimensional terms are defined as follows: forcement, in. [see Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1]
Dopnominal outside diameter of pipe, in. T′bpnominal wall thickness of attached branch
Dipnominal inside diameter of pipe, in. pipe, in. [see Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1]
Dmpmean diameter of designated run pipe, in. Trpnominal wall thickness of designated run
[see NB-3683.8(c) and Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1] pipe, in. [see Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1]
p2Rm p (Do − Tr) tpnominal wall thickness of pipe, in. For
Dmaxpmaximum outside diameter of cross sec- piping products purchased to a minimum
tion, in. wall specification, the nominal wall thick-
160
NB-3683.1 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3683.1
ness shall be taken as 1.14 times the mini-

mum wall.
tmaxpmaximum wall thickness of a welding transi-
tion within a distance of √ Dot from the
welding end [see NB-3683.5(b)]
tnpwall thickness of nozzle or branch connec-
tion reinforcement, in. (see NB-3683.8; also
used for concentric and eccentric reducers,
see NB-3683.6)
FIG. NB-3683.1(c)-1
t1pnominal wall thickness at large end of con-
centric and eccentric reducers, in. (see NB-
3683.6)
t2pnominal wall thickness at small end of
concentric and eccentric reducers, in. (see (c) Connecting Welds. Connecting welds in accord-
NB-3683.6) ance with the requirements of this Subsection are defined
t1m,t2mpminimum wall thickness at the large end as either flush or as-welded welds.
and small end of a reducer, respectively, (1) Flush welds are those welds with contours as
that is required to resist the Design Pressure defined in Fig. NB-3683.1(c)-1. The total thickness
P in accordance with Eq. (1), NB-3641.1 (both inside and outside) of the weld reinforcement
Zpsection modulus of pipe, in.3 shall not exceed 0.1t. There shall be no concavity on
p2I /Do either the interior or exterior surfaces and the finished
Zbpapproximate section modulus of attached contour shall not have any slope greater than 7 deg.
branch pipe, in.3 where the angle is measured from a tangent to the
pp(r′m)2T′b surface of the pipe or on the tapered transition side
Zrpapproximate section modulus of designated of the weld to the nominal transition surface.
run pipe, in.3 (2) As-welded welds are those welds not meeting
pp (Rm)2Tr the special requirements of flush welds.
apcone angle of concentric and eccentric re- (d) Loadings. Loadings for which stress indices are
ducers, deg. (see NB-3683.6) given include internal pressure, bending and torsional
Dpradial weld shrinkage measured from the moments, and temperature differences. The indices are
intended to be sufficiently conservative to account also
nominal outside surface, in.
for the effects of transverse shear forces normally
unpslope of nozzle-to-pipe transition for branch
encountered in flexible piping systems. If, however,
connections, deg. [see Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1]
thrust or shear forces account for a significant portion
(b) Material Properties. Unless otherwise specified,
of the loading on a given piping product, the effect
material properties at the appropriate temperature, as
of these forces shall be included in the design analysis.
given in Section II, Part D, Subparts 1 and 2, shall
The values of the moments and forces shall be obtained
be used. Terms are defined as follows: from an analysis of the piping system in accordance
Epmodulus of elasticity for the material at with NB-3672. Loading terms are defined as follows:
room temperature, psi, taken from Tables M1,M2,
TM M3porthogonal moment loading components at
Mpmaterials constant a given position in a piping system, in.-lb
p2, for ferritic steels and nonferrous materials Mijporthogonal moment components of a tee or
except nickel–chrome–iron alloys and branch connection as shown in Fig. NB-
nickel–iron–chrome alloys 3683.1(d)-1 where i p x, y, z and j p 1,2,3
p2.7, for austenitic steel, nickel–chrome–iron
alloys and nickel–iron–chrome alloys [see Mtpresultant moment loading applied during the
NB-3683.2(b)] specified operating cycle for straight-through
Sypyield strength of the material at the Design products such as straight pipe, curved pipe
Temperature, psi, taken from Table Y-1 or elbows, and concentric reducers
npPoisson’s ratio p√ M12 + M22 + M32
p0.3 PpDesign Pressure, psi
161
sources shall be done after determination

of Mir .
For branch connections or tees, the pressure term of
Eqs. (9), (10), (11), and (13) shall be replaced by the
following terms:
For Eq. (9): B1 (PDo /2Tr)
For Eqs. (10) and (13): C1 (Po Do /2Tr)
For Eq. (11): K1 C1 (Po Do /2Tr)

For branch connections or tees, the moment term of
FIG. NB-3683.1(d)-1 Eqs. (9) through (13) shall be replaced by the following
pairs of terms:
For Eq. (9): B2b (Mb /Zb) + B2r (Mr /Zr)
For Eqs. (10) and (13): C2b (Mb /Zb) + C2r (Mr /Zr)
Poprange of service pressure, psi
P*pmaximum value of pressure in the load For Eq. (11): C2b K2b (Mb /Zb)+C2r K2r(Mr /Zr)
cycle under consideration, psi
The moment components Mx1, Mx2, My1, My2, Mz1, For Eq. (12): C2b (Mb* /Zb) + C2r (Mr* /Zr)
and Mz2 for the run are calculated at the intersection where the approximate section moduli are:
of the run and branch center lines. The moment compo-
nents Mx3, My3, and Mz3 for a branch connection where Zb p p (r ′m )2 T ′b
do /Do ≤ 0.5 may be calculated for a point on the branch
center line at a distance Do /2 from the intersection of Zr p p (Rm )2 Tr
the run and branch center lines. Otherwise, Mx3, My3,
and Mz3 are calculated at the intersection of the run NB-3683.2 Applicability of Indices — General. 98
and branch center lines. The B, C, and K stress indices given herein and in
Mbpresultant moment on the branch for branch Table NB-3681(a)-1 predict stresses at a weld joint or
connections or tees, in.-lb within the body of a particular product. The stress
p√ M 2x3 + M2y3 + M 2z3 indices given for ANSI B16.9, ANSI B16.28, and MSS
Mb*psame as Mb, except it includes only moments SP-87 piping products apply only to seamless products
due to thermal expansion and thermal anchor with no connections, attachments, or other extraneous
movements stress raisers on the body thereof. The stress indices
Mrpresultant moment on the run for branch for welds are not applicable if the radial weld shrinkage
connections or tees, in.-lb D is greater than 0.25t.
p√ M 2xr + M2yr + M 2zr For products with longitudinal butt welds, the K1,
Mr*psame as Mr except it includes only moments K2, and K3 indices shown shall be multiplied by 1.1
due to thermal expansion and thermal anchor for flush welds or by 1.3 for as-welded welds. At the
movements intersection of a longitudinal butt weld in straight pipe
Mxr , Myr , with a girth butt weld or girth fillet weld, the C1, K1,
Mzrprun moment components for use with the C2, K2, and K3 indices shall be taken as the product
stress indices of NB-3683.8 and NB-3683.9. of the respective indices.
Their numerical values are calculated as (a) Abutting Products. In general and unless other-
follows. If Mi1 and Mi2 (where i p x,y,z) wise specified, it is not required to take the product
have the same algebraic sign (+ /−), then of stress indices for two piping products, such as a
Mir equals zero. If Mi1 and Mi 2 have opposite tee and a reducer when welded together, or a tee and
algebraic signs, then Mir equals the smaller a girth butt weld. The piping product and the weld
of Mi1 or Mi 2. If Mi1 and Mi 2 are unsigned, shall be qualified separately.
then Mir may be taken as the smaller of For curved pipe or butt welding elbows welded
Mi1 or Mi 2. Combination of signed and together or joined by a piece of straight pipe less than
unsigned moments from different load one pipe diameter long, the stress indices shall be taken
162
NB-3683.2 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3683.5
as the product of the indices for the elbow or curved butt welds in straight pipe, except as modified in NB-
pipe and the indices for the girth butt weld, except 3683.2.
for B1 and C′3 which are exempted. (b) Girth Butt Welds. The stress indices given in
(b) Out-of-Round Products. The stress indices given Table NB-3681(a)-1, except as modified herein and in
in Table NB-3681(a)-1 are applicable for products and NB-3683.2, are applicable to girth butt welds connecting
welds with out-of-roundness not greater than 0.08t abutting products for which the wall thickness is be-
where out-of-roundness is defined as Dmax − Dmin. For tween 0.875t and 1.1t for an axial distance of
straight pipe, curved pipe, longitudinal butt welds in √ Do t from the welding ends. Girth welds may also
straight pipe, girth butt welds, NB-4250 transitions, exhibit a reduction in diameter due to shrinkage of the
and 1:3 transitions not meeting this requirement, the weld material during cooling. The indices are not
stress indices shall be modified as specified below. applicable if D/t is greater than 0.25 where D is the
(1) If the cross section is out-of-round but with no radial shrinkage measured from the nominal outside
discontinuity in radius, e.g., an elliptical cross section, an surface.
acceptable value of K1 may be obtained by multiplying For as-welded girth butt welds joining items with
the tabulated values of K1 by the factor F1a: nominal wall thicknesses t < 0.237, the C2 index shall
be taken as:
3 4
Dmax − Dmin 1.5
F1a p 1 +
t 1 +0.455(Do / t)3(p / E) C2 p 1.0 + 0.094 / t but not > 2.1
(c) Girth Fillet Welds. The stress indices given in

where
Table NB-3681(a)-1 are applicable to girth fillet welds
Dop nominal outside diameter, in.
used to attach socket welding fittings, socket welding
Ep modulus of elasticity of material at room tem-
valves, slip-on flanges, or socket welding flanges, except
perature, psi
as added to or modified in NB-3683.1, and in (1) and
pp internal pressure (use maximum value of pres-
(2) below.
sure in the load cycle under consideration), psi
(1) Primary Stress Indices. The B1 and B2 indices
Other symbols are defined in (b) above. shall be taken as:
(2) If there are discontinuities in radius, e.g., a
flat spot, and if Dmax − Dmin is not greater than
0.08Do, an acceptable value of K1 may be obtained by B1 p 0.75(tn /Cx) ≥ 0.5
multiplying the tabulated values of K1 by the factor F1b :
B2 p 1.5(tn /Cx) ≥ 1.0
F1b p 1 + MSy / (PDo / 2t)
where Cx and tn are defined in Fig. NB-4427-1, sketches
where (c) and (d). In Fig. NB-4427-1 sketch (c), Cx shall be
Mp 2, for ferritic steels and nonferrous materials taken as Xmin and Cx ≥ 1.25tn. In Fig. NB-4427-1
except nickel–chromium–iron alloys and sketch (d), Cx ≥ 0.75tn. For unequal leg lengths use
nickel–iron–chromium alloys the smaller leg length for Cx.
p 2.7, for austenitic steel, nickel–chromium–iron (2) Primary Plus Secondary Stress Indices. The
alloys, and nickel–iron–chromium alloys C1 and C2 indices shall be taken as:
Pp Design Pressure, psi
Syp yield strength at Design Temperature (Section C1 p 1.8(tn /Cx) ≥ 1.4
II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table Y-1), psi
Do and t are defined in (a) and (b) above.
C2 p 2.1(tn /Cx) ≥ 1.3
NB-3683.3 Straight Pipe Remote From Welds. The
stress indices given in Table NB-3681(a)-1 apply for
straight pipe remote from welds or other discontinuities, NB-3683.5 Welded Transitions. The stress indices 98
except as modified by NB-3683.2. given in Table NB-3681(a)-1, except as modified herein

and in NB-3683.2, are applicable for NB-4250 welded
98 NB-3683.4 Welds transitions as defined under NB-3683.5(a) and for 1:3
(a) Longitudinal Butt Welds. The stress indices given welded transitions as defined under NB-3683.5(b). Girth
in Table NB-3681(a)-1 are applicable for longitudinal butt welds may also exhibit a reduction in diameter
163
due to shrinkage of the weld material during cooling. where tmax is the maximum wall thickness within the
The indices are not applicable if D/t is greater than 0.25. transition zone. If (tmax /t) ≤ 1.10, the stress indices
(a) NB-4250 Transitions. The stress indices given in given in NB-3683.4(b) for girth butt welds may be
Table NB-3681(a)-1, except as modified herein and in used. For flush welds and for as-welded joints between
NB-3683.2, are applicable to girth butt welds between items with t > 0.237, C1 and C2 shall be taken as:
a product for which the wall thickness is between
0.875t and 1.1t for an axial distance of √ Do t from
C1 p 1.0
the welding end and an abutting product for which the
welding end is within the envelope of Fig. NB-4250-
1, but with inside and outside surfaces that do not
C2 p tmax / t but not > the smaller of
slope in the same direction. For transitions meeting
(1.33 + 0.04 √ Do / t) or 2.1
these requirements, the C1, C2, and C3 indices shall
be taken as:
NB-3683.6 Concentric and Eccentric Reducers. 98

C1 p 0.5 + 0.33 (Do / t)0.3 + 0.047 / t but not > 1.8 The stress indices given in Table NB-3681(a)-1, except
as modified herein and in NB-3683.2, are applicable
to butt welding reducers manufactured to the require-
C2 p 1.7 + 0.094 / t but not > 2.1
ments of ANSI B16.9 or MSS SP-87 if the cone angle
a defined in Fig. NB-3683.6-1 is less than 60 deg.
C3 p 1.0 + 0.03 (Do / t) but not > 2.0 and if the wall thickness is not less than t1m throughout
the body of the reducer, except in and immediately
adjacent to the cylindrical portion on the small end
For flush welds and for as-welded joints between items where the thickness shall not be less than t2m. The
with t > 0.237, C1 and C2 shall be taken as: wall thicknesses t1m and t2m are the minimum thicknesses
required to resist the Design Pressure P at the large
C1 p 0.5 + 0.33 (Do / t)0.3 but not > 1.8 end and small end, respectively, in accordance with
Eq. (1) of NB-3641.1. For eccentric reducers, the
dimensions shown in Fig. NB-3683.6-1 are to be taken
C2 p 1.7 at the location on the circumference where a is the
maximum.
(b) Transitions Within a 1:3 Slope. The stress indices (a) Primary Stress Indices. The B1 stress indices
given in Table NB-3681(a)-1, except as modified herein given in (1) or (2) below shall be used depending on
and in NB-3683.2, are applicable for girth butt welds the cone angle a.
between a product for which the wall thickness is (1) B1 p 0.5 for a ≤ 30 deg.
between 0.875t and 1.1t for an axial distance of (2) B1 p 1.0 for 30 deg. < a ≤ 60 deg.
(b) Primary Plus Secondary Stress Indices. The C1
√ Dot from the welding end and an abutting product and C2 stress indices given in (1) or (2) below shall
for which the welding end is within an envelope defined
be used depending on the dimensions of the transition
by a 1:3 slope on the inside, outside, or both surfaces
radii r1 and r2.
for an axial distance of √ Dot, but with inside and (1) For reducers with r1 and r2 ≥ 0.1 D1:
outside surfaces that do not slope in the same direction.
For transitions meeting these requirements, the C1, C2,
C1 p 1.0 + 0.0058 a √ Dn / tn
and C3 indices shall be taken as:
C2 p 1.0 + 0.36 a0.4 (Dn / tn )0.4(D2 / D1 − 0.5)
C1 p 1.0 + 0.047 / tp but not > 1.8
where Dn / tn is the larger of D1 / t1 and D2 / t2 .
(2) For reducers with r1 and / or r2 < 0.1D1 :
C2 p tmax / t + 0.094 / t but not > the smaller of
(1.33 + 0.04 √ Do / t + 0.094 / t) or 2.1
C1 p 1.0 + 0.00465 a1.285 (Dn / tn )0.39
C3 p 0.35 (tmax / t) + 0.25 but not > 2.0 C2 p 1.0 + 0.0185 a √ Dn / tn
164
NB-3683.6 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3683.8
NB-3683.7 Curved Pipe or Butt Welding Elbows. 98

The stress indices given in Table NB-3681(a)-1, except
as modified herein and in NB-3683.2, are applicable
to curved pipe or butt welding elbows manufactured
to the requirements of ANSI B16.9, ANSI B16.28, or
MSS SP-87.
(a) Primary Stress Index. The B1 and B2 indices
shall be taken as:
B1 p −0.1 + 0.4h but not < 0 nor > 0.5

2⁄
B2 p 1.30 / h 3 but not < 1.0
where
FIG. NB-3683.6-1
h p tR / rm2
(b) Primary Plus Secondary Stress Indices. The C1

and C2 indices shall be taken as:
where Dn /tn is the larger of D1 /t1 and D2 /t2.
(c) Peak Stress Indices. The K1 and K2 indices given C1 p (2R − rm ) / 2(R − rm )
in (1), (2), or (3) below shall be used depending on
2⁄
the type of connecting weld and thickness dimensions. C2 p 1.95 / h 3 but not < 1.5
(1) For reducers connected to pipe with flush girth
butt welds: where
K1 p 1.1 − 0.1 Lm / √ Dm tm but not < 1.0 h p tR / rm2
K2 p 1.1 − 0.1 Lm / √ Dm tm but not < 1.0

NB-3683.8 Branch Connections per NB-3643. The 98
stress indices given in Table NB-3681(a)-1, except as
where Lm / √ Dm tm is the smaller of L1 / √ D1 t1 and modified herein and in NB-3683.2, are applicable to
L2 / √ D2 t2 . reinforced or unreinforced branch connections meeting
(2) For reducers connected to pipe with as-welded the general requirements of NB-3643 and the additional
girth butt welds where t1 and t2 > 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm): requirements of NB-3683.8(a). Symbols are defined in
NB-3683.1 and in Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1.
K1 p 1.2 − 0.2 Lm / √ Dm tm but not < 1.0 (a) Applicability. The stress indices are applicable,
provided the following limitations are met.
K2 p 1.8 − 0.8 Lm / √ Dm tm but not < 1.0 (1) For branch connections in a pipe, the arc
distance measured between the centers of adjacent
branches along the outside surface of the run pipe is
where Lm / √ Dm tm is the smaller of L1 / √ D1 t1 and not less than three times the sum of the two adjacent
L2 / √ D2 t2 . branch inside radii in the longitudinal direction, or is
(3) For reducers connected to pipe with as-welded not less than two times the sum of the two adjacent
girth butt welds where t1 or t2 ≤ 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm): branch radii along the circumference of the run pipe.
(2) The axis of the branch connection is normal
K1 p 1.2 − 0.2 Lm / √ Dm tm but not < 1.0 to the run pipe surface.
(3) The run pipe radius-to-thickness ratio Rm /Tr
K2 p 2.5 − 1.5 Lm / √ Dm tm but not < 1.0 is less than 50, and the branch-to-run radius ratio
r′m /Rm is less than 0.50.
(4) The inside corner radius r1 [Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-
where Lm / √ Dm tm is the smaller of L1 / √ D1 t1 and 1] for nominal pipe sizes greater than 4 in. NPS
L2 / √ D2 t2 . (DN 100) shall be between 10% and 50% of Tr . The
165
radius r1 is not required for branch pipe sizes smaller tn p T ′b + (2 / 3)y if u ≤ 30°
than 4 in. NPS (DN 100).
(5) The branch-to-run fillet radius r2 is not less p T ′b + 0.385 L1 if u > 30°
than the larger of Tb /2, Tr /2, or (T′b + y) /2 [Fig. NB-
3643.3(a)-1 sketch (c)]. For Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1 sketch (d):
(6) The branch-to-pipe fillet radius r3 is not less
than the larger of 0.002 u do or 2(sinu)3 times offset tn p T ′ b p T b
[Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1], where u is expressed in deg.
(7) If L1 equals or exceeds 0.5 √ riTb, then r′m (d) Peak Stress Indices. The peak stress indices K2b
can be taken as the radius to the center of Tb. and K2r for moment loadings [see NB-3683.1(d)] shall
(b) Primary Stress Indices. The primary stress indices be taken as:
B2b and B2r shall be taken as:
K2b p 1.0
B2b p 0.5C2b but not < 1.0
K2r p 1.75
B2r p 0.75C2r but not < 1.0
and K2rC 2r shall be a minimum of 2.65.
(c) Primary Plus Secondary Stress Indices. The C1, NB-3683.9 Butt Welding Tees. The stress indices 98
C2b, and C2r indices [for moment loadings, see NB- given in Table NB-3681(a)-1, except as modified herein
3683.1(d)] shall be taken as: and in NB-3683.2, are applicable to butt welding tees
manufactured to the requirements of ANSI B16.9 or
0.182 0.367 0.382 0.148 MSS SP-87.
C1 p 1.4 1DT 2 1Dd 2 1Tt 2 1rt 2
m
r
m
m
r
n
n
2
(a) Primary Stress Indices. The primary stress indices
B2b and B2r shall be taken as:
2⁄
but not < 1.2 B2b p 0.4 (Rm / Tr ) 3 but not < 1.0
2⁄
If r2 / tn > 12, use r2 / tn p 12 for computing C1 . B2r p 0.50 (Rm / Tr ) 3 but not < 1.0
2⁄ 1⁄ (b) Primary Plus Secondary Stress Indices. The C2b

3
r ′m 2
T ′b r ′m
1 2 1 2 1 21 2
R
C2b p3 m and C2r stress indices for moment loadings [see NB-
Tr Rm Tr r p 3683.1(d)] shall be taken as:
2⁄
but not < 1.5 C2b p 0.67 (Rm / Tr ) 3 but not < 2.0
2⁄
1⁄
C2r p 0.67 (Rm / Tr ) 3 but not < 2.0
r ′m 4
C2r p 1.15 1 2 tn
(c) Peak Stress Indices. The peak stress indices K2b
and K2r for moment loadings [see NB-3683.1(d)] shall
but not < 1.5
be taken as:
where K2b p 1.0

For Figs. NB-3643.3(a)-1 sketches (a) and (b):
K2r p 1.0
1⁄
tn p Tb if L1 ≥ 0.5 (dm Tb ) 2
1⁄
p T ′b if L1 < 0.5(dm Tb ) 2
NB-3684 Stress Indices for Detailed Analysis
The symbols for the stress components and their
definitions are given in Fig. NB-3684-1. These defini-
For Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-1 sketch (c): tions are applicable to all piping products, and the
166
NB-3684 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3686.1
rpmean cross section radius, in.

tmpminimum specified wall thickness, in.
Zpsection modulus of cross section, in.3
p0.0982 (Do4 − Di4) /Do
lptm R /r 2√ 1 − v2 (Table NB-3685.1-2 limited
to l ≥ 0.2)
NB-3685.3 Stress From Stress Indices. To obtain
stresses from stress index:
Load Multiply Stress Index by

Internal Pressure P
Mx Mx /2Z
My My /Z
Mz Mz /Z
NB-3685.4 Classification of Stresses. For analysis

of a curved pipe or welding elbow to NB-3210, the
following rules shall apply to the classification of
stresses developed under a load controlled in-plane or
FIG. NB-3684-1 DIRECTION OF STRESS out-of-plane moment as distinguished from a displace-
COMPONENTS ment controlled loading.
(a) The entire membrane portion of the axial, circum-
ferential, and torsional stresses shall be considered as
primary (PL ).
stress indices given in the tables in NB-3685 and NB- (b) Seventy-five percent of the through-wall bending
3338 are so defined. stresses in both the axial and the circumferential direc-
tions shall be classified as primary (Pb). The remaining
25% shall be classified as secondary (Q). The stresses
NB-3685 Curved Pipe or Welding Elbows induced by displacement controlled in-plane or out-of-
98 NB-3685.1 Applicability of Indices. The indices plane moments shall be classified as secondary (Q).
given in Tables NB-3685.1-1 and NB-3685.1-2 give
stresses in curved pipe or elbows at points remote from
NB-3686 Flexibility Factors
girth or longitudinal welds or other local discontinuities.
Stresses in curved pipe or welding elbows with local NB-3686.1 Straight Pipe. For M p M1 or M2 (see
discontinuities, such as longitudinal welds, support lugs, Fig. NB-3686.1-1):
and branch connections in the elbow, shall be obtained
by appropriate theoretical analysis or by experimental Ml
analysis in accordance with Appendix II. k p 1.0 unom p
EI
98 NB-3685.2 Nomenclature (Fig. NB-3685.2-1)
Apan additional thickness, in. (NB-3641.1) For MpM3 (see Fig. NB-3686.1-1):
DipDo − 2(tm − A), in.
Dopnominal outside diameter of cross section,
Ml
in. k p 1.0 unom p
GJ
D1(D2)pmaximum (minimum) outside diameter of
elbow with out-of-round cross section essen-
tially describable as an ellipse or oval shape In both cases
(Fig. NB-3685.2-1), in. Ep modulus of elasticity, psi
Epmodulus of elasticity, psi (Section II, Part Gp shear modulus, psi
D, Subpart 1, Tables TM) Ip plane moment of inertia, in.4
Ppinternal pressure, psi Jp polar moment of inertia, in.4
Rpbend radius, in. lp one pipe diameter
167
TABLE NB-3685.1-1
CURVED PIPE OR WELDING END ELBOWS, INTERNAL PRESSURE
Stress
Location Surface Direction Stress Index [Note (1)]
Round Cross Section

f Inside sn
0.5(2R + r sin f )
3 43 4
Do − 0.8(tm − A)
f Mid sn p i1
f Outside sn 2(tm − A) R + r sin f
f Inside st
Di
f Mid st p i2
f Outside st 4(tm − A)
Out-of-Round Cross Section [Note (2)]
a Inside sn i1 + i3
a Mid sn i1
a Outside sn i1 − i3
a Inside st i2 + 0.3i3
a Mid st i2
a Outside st i2 − 0.3i3
NOTES:
(1) The radial stress sr is equal to −P on the inside surface, to −P/2 on the midsurface, and to 0 on the
outside surface.
(2) For out-of-round cross section:
3 4 31 + 0.455(D /t ) 4 cos 2a
Do(D1 − D2) 1.5
i3 p
2tm2 o m
3 (P/E)
E
a
NB-3686.2 Curved Pipe and Welding Elbows. The R
unom p M (d a )
flexibility factors may be calculated by the equations EI o
given below for k, provided25 that:
(a) R /r is not less than 1.7;
For M3 (see Fig. NB-3686.2-1):
(b) center line length Ra is greater than 2r;
(c) there are no flanges or other similar stiffeners
within a distance r from either end of the curved k p 1.0
section of pipe or from the ends of welding elbows.
For M1 or M2 (see Fig. NB-3686.2-1):
E
a
R
unom p M (d a )
GJ o
3 4
1.65 1
kp
h 1 + (Pr / tE)Xk
In both cases
Ep modulus of elasticity, psi
but not less than 1.0, and Gp shear modulus of elasticity, psi
hp tR /r 2
25 The
Ip plane moment of inertia of cross section, in.4
flexibility of a curved pipe or welding elbow is reduced by
end effects, provided either by the adjacent straight pipe or by the Jp polar moment of inertia of cross section, in.4
proximity of other relatively stiff members which inhibit ovalization Pp internal pressure, psi
of the cross section. In certain cases, these end effects may also Rp bend radius, in.
reduce the stress. Additional work is underway to provide guidance
for both flexibility factors and stress indices where end effects are rp pipe or elbow mean radius, in.
significant. tp pipe or elbow nominal wall thickness, in.
168
NB-3686.2 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3686.5
TABLE NB-3685.1-2
CURVED PIPE OR WELDING END ELBOWS, MOMENT LOADING (l ≥ 0.2)
Location Surface Stress Direction Stress Index [Note (1)]
Torsional Moment Mx
All All tnt [Note (2)] 1.0
In-Plane or Out-of-Plane Moments My or Mz [Note (3)]
f Outside sn nstm + snb

f Mid sn nstm
f Inside sn nstm − snb
f Outside st stm + nsnb

f Mid st stm
f Inside st stm − nsnb
NOTES:
(1) The radial stress sr is zero for all surfaces.
(2) tnt is a shear stress in the n–t plane and must be appropriately combined with the principal stresses sn and st to obtain principal stresses
due to combinations of Mx with My or Mz .
(3) Nomenclature for stress indices:
n p Poisson’s ratio
stm p sinf + [(1.5X2 − 18.75) sin 3f + 11.25 sin 5f]/X4
snb p l (9X2 cos 2 f + 225 cos 4 f)/X4 6In-plane M z
stm p cosf + [(1.5X2 − 18.75) cos 3 f + 11.25 cos 5 f]/X4

snb p −l (9X2 sin 2 f + 225 sin 4 f)/X4 6
Out-of-plane My
X1 = 5+ 6 l2 + 24c
X2 = 17 + 600l2 + 480c
X3 = X1X2 − 6.25
X4 = (1 − n 2)(X3 − 4.5X2)
l = tmR/(r 2 √ 1 − n 2) (Equations are valid for l ≥ 0.2 only.)
c = PR2/Ertm
Xkp 6(r /t)4 /3 (R /r)1 /3 dimensional limitations of NB-3683.8.) The load dis-
ap arc angle, rad placement relationships may be obtained by modeling
the branch connections in the piping system analysis
NB-3686.3 Miter Bends. The requirements of NB-
(NB-3672) as shown in (a) through (d) below. (See
3681(d) apply.
Fig. NB-3686.5-1.)
NB-3686.4 Welding Tee or Branch Connections. (a) The values of k are given below.
For welding tees (ANSI B16.9) or branch connections For Mx3:
(NB-3643) not included in NB-3686.5, the load displace- 1⁄
ment relationships shall be obtained by assuming that k p 0.1 (D / Tr )1.5[(Tr / tn ) (d / D)] 2(T ′b / Tr )
the run pipe and branch pipe extend to the intersection
of the run pipe center line with the branch pipe center For Mz3:
line. The imaginary juncture is to be assumed rigid,
1⁄
and the imaginary length of branch pipe from the k p 0.2(D / Tr ) [(Tr / tn )(d / D)] 2(T ′b / Tr )
juncture to the run pipe surface is also to be as-
sumed rigid.
where
98 NB-3686.5 Branch Connections in Straight Pipe. Dp run pipe outside diameter, in.
(For branch connections in straight pipe meeting the dp branch pipe outside diameter, in.
169
Fig. NB-3685.2-1 1998 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NB Fig. NB-3686.2-1
FIG. NB-3685.2-1 ELBOW NOMENCLATURE
FIG. NB-3686.1-1
FIG. NB-3686.2-1
170
NB-3686.5 NB-3000 — DESIGN NB-3692
Ep modulus of elasticity, psi

Ibp moment of inertia of branch pipe, in.4 (to be
calculated using d and T′b)
Mp Mx3 or Mz3, as defined in NB-3683.1(d)
Trp run pipe wall thickness, in.
fp rotation in direction of moment, rad
(b) For branch connections per Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-
1 sketches (a) and (b):
1⁄
tn p Tb if L1 ≥ 0.5 [(2ri + Tb ) Tb ] 2
1⁄
p T ′b if L1 <0.5 [(2ri + Tb )Tb ] 2
FIG. NB-3686.5-1 BRANCH CONNECTIONS
IN STRAIGHT PIPE
(c) For branch connections per Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-

1 sketch (c): NB-3690 DIMENSIONAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR PIPING PRODUCTS
NB-3691 Standard Piping Products
tn p T ′b + (2⁄3)y if un ≤ 30 deg. Dimensions of standard piping products shall comply
with the standards and specifications listed in Table
p T ′b + 0.385L1 if un > 30 deg. NB-3132-1. However, compliance with these standards
does not replace or eliminate the requirements of
NB-3625.
(d) For branch connections per Fig. NB-3643.3(a)-

NB-3692 Nonstandard Piping Products
1 sketch (d):
The dimensions of nonstandard piping products shall
be such as to provide strength and performance as
required by this Subsection. Nonstandard piping prod-
tn p T ′ b p T b ucts shall be designed in accordance with NB-3640.
171

Asme3d1 nb-3000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asme3d1 nb-3000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARTICLE NB-3000

NB-3100 General Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

NB-3200 Design by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

NB-3300 Vessel Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

NB-3400 Pump Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

NB-3500 Valve Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

NB-3600 Piping Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Pipe and Tubes

Fittings, Flanges, and Gaskets

NB-3137 Reinforcement for Openings

NB-3200 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS NB-3213.1 Stress Intensity.2 Stress intensity is the

FIG. NB-3213-1 EXAMPLES OF REVERSING AND NONREVERSING DYNAMIC LOADS

Vessel Part Location Origin of Stress Type of Stress Classification

TABLE NB-3217-1 (CONT’D)

Vessel Part Location Origin of Stress Type of Stress Classification

Pressure and external Membrane PL

Nonlinear portion of stress F

Axial thermal gradient Q Yes No

Thermal gradient Q Yes No

Linear radial thermal gradient F Yes No

FIG. NB-3221-1 STRESS CATEGORIES AND LIMITS OF STRESS INTENSITY

where S is defined as follows. expansion, the total algebraic range of temperature

ASME B&PVC sec3nb$u15 05-07-99 03:42:25 pd: sec3nb Rev 14.04

requirements of NB-3224.1 through NB-3224.6 above (1) For Pm ≤ 0.67Sy

ASME B&PVC sec3nb$u15 05-07-99 03:42:25 pd: sec3nb Rev 14.04

that when the distance to a free edge is larger than

ASME B&PVC sec3nb$u15 05-07-99 03:42:25 pd: sec3nb Rev 14.04

determined by application of II-1430, in which case TABLE NB-3228.5(b)-1

alone or coincident with earthquake and other reversing

NB-3310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Method is used. If fatigue analysis is not required, the

NB-3332 Reinforcement Requirements for

A p 0.5 dtr tnp nominal nozzle thickness, as indicated, in.

NB-3337 Attachment of Nozzles and Other

(d) The indices of Table NB-3338.2(c)-1 apply when

For lateral connections in cylinders:

FIG. NB-3338.2(a)-2 NOZZLE DIMENSIONS

TABLE NB-3338.2(c)-1 NB-3339.1 Limitations. These alternative rules are

FIG. NB-3339.1(b)-1 EXAMPLES OF ACCEPTABLE TRANSITION DETAILS

vessels and in NB-3324.2 for spherical vessels TABLE NB-3339.3-1

FIG. NB-3339.4-1 LIMITS OF REINFORCING ZONE

TABLE NB-3339.7(c)-1 NB-3340 ANALYSIS OF VESSELS

Nozzles in Spherical Shells and Spherical Heads

st −0.2 2.0 − d/D NB-3351 Welded Joint Category

NB-3351.1 Category A. Category A comprises longi-

FIG. NB-3351-1 WELDED JOINT LOCATIONS TYPICAL OF CATEGORIES A, B, C, AND D

FIG. NB-3352-1 TYPICAL BUTT JOINTS

NB-3400 PUMP DESIGN

NB-3411.2 Exemptions. The rules of NB-3400 do 98

NB-3414 Design and Service Conditions NB-3422 Axially Split Casing

NB-3423 Single and Double Volute Casings

(b) To avoid stress concentrations, the outside radius

NB-3433.2 Radially Oriented Inlets and Outlets.

NB-3433.3 Tangential Inlets and Outlets. Except

NB-3433.4 Minimum Inlet and Outlet Wall Thick-

NB-3440 DESIGN OF SPECIFIC PUMP

(1) That section of the pump casing within the

NB-3442 Special Pump Types — Type J

FIG. NB-3441.3-2 TYPE C PUMP

A design may be accepted provided it meets one of

NB-3513 Acceptability of Small Valves NB-3525 Levels A and B Service Limits

The rules of this paragraph constitute minimum re-